Home

Nikon D700 User Manual

Contents

1. Choose a white balance setting g pg 141 gt wA Control panel Fine tune white balance co ol a gt LEA pg 146 set color M f NOI temperature SY Ore pg 147 or WB button Sub command dial choose a white balance preset pg 15 EE Flash Settings 7 Control panel Press the 4 button and rotate the command dials Choose flash mode pg 185 La x M QW Adjust flash compensation pg 190 Ss La x Attaching the AN D700 Camera Strap Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as shown below The BM 9 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right 21 Quick Start Guide Follow these steps for a quick start with your camera 7 1 Charge the battery pg 32 2 Insert the battery pg 34 3 Attach a lens pg 36 4 inserta memory card pg 41
2. Is PROA RR ISO sensitivity settings available Lo 1 Lo 0 7 Lo 0 3 200 250 320 400 500 1 3 step 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 default 3200 4000 5000 6400 Hi 0 3 Hi 0 7 Hi 1 Hi 2 Lo 1 Lo 0 5 200 280 400 560 800 1100 1 2 step 1600 2200 3200 4500 6400 Hi 0 5 Hi 1 Hi 2 Lo 1 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 Hi 1 1 step f Hi 2 If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the ISO step value is changed If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the nearest available setting Hi 0 3 Hi 2 The settings Hi 0 3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 2 EV over ISO 6400 ISO 8000 25600 equivalent Pictures taken at these settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion Lo 0 3 Lo 1 The settings Lo 0 3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 ISO 160 100 equivalent Use for larger apertures when lighting is bright Contrast is slightly lower than normal in most cases ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended See Also For information on Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 292 For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 278 107 108 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control If Off the default setting is chosen for the ISO sensitivi
3. 1 ISO Sensitivity When auto ISO sensitivity control is on pg 108 ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted as required for optimal flash output when an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 flash unit is attached This may result in foreground subjects being underexposed in photographs taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background In these cases choose a flash mode other than slow sync or choose a larger aperture 384 Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D700 Power sources Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL3e pp 32 34 Additional EN EL3e batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon service representatives The EN EL3e can be recharged using an MH 18a or MH 18 quick charger Multi Power Battery Pack MB D10 The MB D10 takes one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries It is equipped with a shutter release button AF 0N button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D10 remove contact cover for the MB D10 from the camera Quick Charger MH 18a pg 32 The MH 18a can be used to recharge EN EL3e battery AC Adapt
4. 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots as long as the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Focus will also remain locked between shots while the AE L AF L button is pressed Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also For information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 79 80 Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases use manual focus pg 81 or use focus lock pg 78 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background Example subject is the same colo
5. Mode Shutter speed Aperture See page p Set automatically by camera f 1 1 12 A 116 1 250 s 60 s Set automatically 5 Value selected by user by camera 118 1 250 s 30 s 2 A Set automatically by camera 119 1 250 s 60 s 14 Value selected M Value selected by user by user 121 5 1 250 s 30 s 2 1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync slow rear curtain sync and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes 2 The built in flash supports speeds of up to 1 320 s when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pp 305 306 Optional SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 flash units support speeds of up to s 000 s at settings of 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP 3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity Consult table of flash ranges pg 427 when setting aperture in A and M modes At default settings the effects of the flash can be previewed by pressing the depth of field preview button to emit a modeling preflash pg 315 Take the picture Compose the photograph focus and shoot If the flash ready indicator 4 blinks for about three seconds after the photograph is taken the flash has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed Check the results in the monitor If the photograph is underexposed adjust settings and try again See Also See page 306 for information on 1 320 s Auto FP 186 Lowering the B
6. Raising the flash interrupts the timer To restart wait until the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder and press the shutter release button halfway To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting bulb In self timer mode a shutter speed of tut amp is equivalent to approximately s s See Also For information on changing the timer duration see Custom Setting c3 Self timer delay pg 297 For information on setting a beep to sound during the timer count down see Custom Setting d1 Beep pg 298 103 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended T Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the WEF release mode dial to Mup AA Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror Frame the picture focus and then press C the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror vV Using the Viewfinder Note that autofocus metering and framing can not be confirmed in the viewfinder while mirror is raised 3 Takea picture 7 Press the shutter release button all the ca way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord pg 389 The mirror lowers
7. 423 HE DX Format 24 x 16 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images 2 Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless _ 5 7 MB 229 65 compressed 12 bit NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit 7 0 MB 174 is NEF RAW _ Compressed 12 bit AME 312 223 NEF RAW _ Compressed 14 bit OMB 209 63 NEF RAW Uncompressed z 8 1 MB 229 39 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 10 7 MB 177 31 14 bit L 15 3 MB 124 23 TIFF RGB M 8 8 MB 220 29 S 4 3 MB 480 59 L 2 5 MB 637 100 JPEG fine 4 M 1 4 MB 1100 100 S 0 6 MB 2400 100 L 1 2 MB 1200 100 JPEG normal 4 M 0 7 MB 2000 100 S 0 3 MB 4400 100 L 0 6 MB 2400 100 JPEG basic 4 M 0 3 MB 3900 100 S 0 2 MB 7800 100 If Auto DX crop is selected for Image area DX format images will be recorded with DX lenses FX format images with other lenses 2 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression ISO sensitivity is setto H 0 3 or higher High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO 4 sensitivity is set to 2000 or higher or long exposure noise reduction active D lighting or image authentication is on 4 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images num
8. Taking Photographs Question Key phrase See page How many more shots can I take with Number of exposures 47 this card remaining How do I take bigger photographs How can I get more photos on the Image quality and size 64 69 memory card Can I control how the camera focuses Autofocus 71 Can I choose the focus point Focus point 76 How do I take a lot of photographs eleses mode 84 quickly Can I change the frame advance rate Shooting speed 86 299 Can I shoot a self portrait Self timer mode 102 Can take pictures under low light ree without ae flash i ISO sensitivity 106 Can the ISO sensitivity choose be ISO sensitivity auto 108 adjusted to ensure optimal exposure _ control Question Key phrase See page How do freeze or blur moving objects Exposure mode E 118 shutter priority auto How do I blur background details or Exposure mode A keep both foreground and background P aah 119 F aperture priority auto in focus Can set both shutter speed and Exposure mode fi 121 aperture manually manual Can make photos brighter or darker Exposure compensation 128 How do make a time exposure Long time exposures 124 h L i Can I vary exposure or flash level Exposure and flash i F 131 315 automatically over a series of photos _ bracketing Can I create multiple copies of a photo White balance R s s A 135 315 using different white balance
9. a Exposure i Control panel mode F command dial Choose a shutter speed exposure mode S or M pp 118 121 L ala Exposure mode Sor Choose an aperture exposure mode A or M pp 119 121 a NORM TAA Exposure Sub command m panel mode A or dial Set exposure compensation pg 128 4 button Activate or cancel q bracketing select number E ie in X rackeung Fn button Main command dial Control panel sequence pp 131 134 Select bracketing exposure increment pg 132 f Fn button Sub command dial Control panel The Fn Button Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 the Fn button and command dials can be used to adjust bracketing settings the default option choose the image area lock shutter speed and aperture select shutter speed and aperture in steps of 1 EV choose pre specified lens data for non CPU lenses or select dynamic area AF The Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f6 Assign preview button pg 324 and f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 the depth of field preview and AE L AF L buttons can be used with the command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button 19 20 HE White Balance Press the WB button and rotate the command dials
10. IX Nikkor lenses can not be used Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR lenses Spot metering meters selected focus point Can not be used with shifting or tilting The camera s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting and or tilting the lens or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used Manual exposure mode only Can be used with AF S and AF I lenses only pg 371 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster UAWN ONO 9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lt New gt or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens at maximum zoom in focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus 10 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF lenses e AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED e AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR e AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED II 2 e AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED e AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II e AF 500mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR e AF I 300mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED II 2 e AF S 300mm f 4D ED e AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G EDVR AF 1 600mm f 4D ED 2 e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2
11. The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography The Creative Lighting System supports the following features e i TTL flash control Improved through the lens TTL flash control for use with CLS see page 184 Flash level is set using monitor pre flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject ensuring optimal flash output e Advanced Wireless Lighting Allows i TTL flash control with remote wireless flash units e FV lock pg 192 Locks flash level at the metered value allowing a series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 306 Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field 377 378 BE CLS Compatible Flash Units The D700 can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 The SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 The principal features of these flash units are listed below Flash unit Feature SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 2 Guide No 3 IS0100 34 111 38 125 30 98 21 69 10 32 IS0200 48 157 53 175 42 138 30 98 14 49 Auto power zoom mm 17 200 24 105 24 85 gt Wide panel mm 12 14 17 14
12. 7 Set the date and time be World time Date and time The dialog shown at right will a be displayed Press lt or gt to 2008 4 select an item A or W to change Press when the clock is set to the current date and time 39 40 8 Set date format E World time gt Date format Press A or W to choose the t YWD Year month d order in which the year month BE ory Monti daviyear and day will be displayed and s pii u press 9 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway I to exit to shooting mode The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter pg 385 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera stores photographs on Type CompactFlash memory cards available separately pg 390 Type Il CompactFlash cards and microdrives can not be used The following section describes how to insert and format a
13. Q gt pee Niko button Select highlighted item BE Navigating the Menus Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus Press the MENU button to display the menus 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu Press lt q to highlight the icon for the current menu gt SHOOTING MENU hooting menu bank Reset shooting menu y Active folder File naming image quality R Image size Image area El JPEG compression 3 Select a menu Press A or W to select the desired menu PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode enon be f Image review rahe ynod Fe al el After delete Susi wwe Inara ye a j M 5 ge Rotate tall 5 rss a we oie Slide show sey side 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu S Playback folder Hide image ere Di Press gt to position the cursor save in the selected menu E Slide show 5 Highlight a menu item PLAYBACK MENU gt Delete Press amp or W to highlight a i lay mod menu item sug Display mode After delete Rotate tall El Slide show 6 Display options Press gt to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option Press A or W to highlight an option 29 30 8 select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection pre
14. 5 Name the Picture Control Name the Picture Control as described on page 170 The new Picture Control ae i i i i IVI Vivid will appear in the Picture Control list and AFEMS aa i i A ect VIVID 02 can be renamed at any time using the i Rename option in the Manage Picture Control menu Grid Adjust E Manage Picture Control a Save edit Delete Load save 173 BE Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card 1 Select Copy to card Ba Manase Picture Control e Load save After displaying the Load save menu as described in Step 1 on page 172 highlight Copy to card and press P Copy to camera Delete from card Copy to card 2 Select a Picture Control E Manase Picture g Copy to card Highlight a custom Picture 4 pop a Control and press gt i 3 Choose a destination E Manave Picture Control g Choose destination Choose a destination from slots ri Aee C103 WONOCHROME 02 1 through 99 and press to GEINT i C05 Unused save the selected Picture tet Control to the memory card Any Picture Controls that may already have been saved to the selected slot will be overwritten Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card 174 Manag
15. Off Tips not displayed 298 d4 CL Mode Shooting Speed This option determines the maximum frame advance rate in CL continuous low speed mode during interval timer photography this setting also determines the frame advance rate for single frame mode Choose from values between one and seven frames per second fps the default setting is 3 fps Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds and that the maximum frame rate without the optional MB D10 battery pack is 5 fps d5 Max Continuous Release The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 423 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer 299 300 d6 File Number Sequence When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last number used when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Option Description On default When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or anew memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the cu
16. To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 265 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s the default setting after shooting 55 Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in Viewing Photographs on the previous page E button 2 Delete the photograph Press the t button A confirmation dialog will be displayed i button 1 Delete 15 07 2008 10 62 27 4256x2 Press the t button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press PJ Delete To delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 262 56 Image Recording Options This section describes how to choose image area quality and size IMAGEIATCA rz srccceccoscrccceccessescenccsccecacestcstccsastcecasarscoscceceoreceeses pg 58 image Quality crccteccsssreccsteccesesssocssctacccccensacesssscsesteastesseaeeres pg 64 ImageSize ae eera e EEEE EAE pg 69 57 58 Image Area The camera s FX format 36 0 x 23 9 mm E Image area image sensor can be used to record pictures
17. e Warranty e Software Suite CD ROM e User s Manual this guide e Registration card e Quick Guide U S A only e Software Installation Guide Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used IV This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This icon marks notes information that should be read before 4 using the camera Menu items options and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC PictBridge is a trademark All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders D700 Introduction Tutorial KE Image Recording Options Focus Release Mode ISO Sensitivity Exposure M White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography E Other Shooting Options E More About Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes Q amp A Ind
18. 1 280 x 720 progressive format 1080i 1080i interlaced 1 920 x 1 080 interlaced format The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device is connected 333 World Time Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically Time zone eh set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock pg 38 Choose the order in which the day month and year are Date format displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Daylight saving time If the clock is not set a blinking icon will appear in the control panel Language Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available De Deutsch German Pt Portugu s Portuguese En English English Ru Pycckn Russian Es Espanol Spanish Sv Svenska Swedish Fi Suomi Finnish chy 8288 _ Traditional Chinese Fr Fran ais French S hafi Simplified Chinese It Italiano Italian A AAs Japanese NI Nederlands Dutch 2 2 Korean PI Polski Polish 334 Image Comment Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed in ViewNX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388
19. 327 328 10 Release Button to Use Dial This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released At the default setting of No the button must be pressed while the command dial is rotated If Yes is selected the setting can be changed by rotating the command dial after the button is released Setting ends when the button is pressed again the shutter release button is pressed halfway or any of the MODE 54 ISO QUAL or WB button is pressed if Auto bracketing is selected for the corresponding dials option as described on page 323 setting will also end when the Fn depth of field preview or AE L AF L button is pressed Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter is used setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off f11 No Memory Card At the default setting of Enable release the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera Note that when photographs are being captured to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the sh
20. 8 aperture aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash Camera varies aperture Custom Setting e5 set to 19 aperture AE only or aperture and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash 4 Flashonly Camera varies flash level only Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash bracketing is performed only with i TTL or AA flash control If a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control pg 108 316 e7 Bracketing Order At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN bracketing is performed in the order described on pages 132 and 136 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value 317 318 f Controls f1 amp Switch Choose the function performed by rotating the power switch to the 8 position Option Description i LCD backlight Cr Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s default Sm Both Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting information is displayed in monitor f2 Multi Selector Center Button This option determines what operations can be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback modes EE Shooting Mode Selecting Shooting mode displays the following option
21. Control panel 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel and viewfinder start to flash A flashing will also appear Control panel in the control panel and viewfinder At 1 default settings the displays will flash ri for about six seconds Viewfinder 4 Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the E reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 5 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel while the viewfinder will show a flashing Gad At default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Control panel l id 7 Viewfinder 151 152 If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing na id will appear in the control panel and viewfinder at default settings the displays will flash for about six seconds Press the shutter Control panel release button halfway to return to i a Step 4 and measure white balance again 7 as Viewfinder 6 Select preset d 0
22. pg 87 will be shown in the viewfinder display For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus see Getting Good Results with Autofocus pg 80 53 54 2 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the picture While the photograph is being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the card slot cover will light Access lamp M The Memory Card Access Lamp Do not eject the memory card turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source until the memory card access lamp has gone out The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down LADER Focus Take photograph Viewing Photographs 1 Press the A button A photograph will be displayed in the monitor AD TAD a 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or gt To view additional information on the current photograph 15 03 2008 a2s6n28 press AandV pg 220 1710 NIKON D700 P 1 250 F11 200 35mm MBAUTO 0 0 sRGB SD 100ND700 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 07 2008 10 02 27 D4256x2832
23. AF L button pg 325 Note that some button press options can not be combined with options using dials Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area 63 Image Quality The following image quality options are available Option Filetype Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic Format NEF Use with images that will be transferred to a computer for printing or NEF RAW NEF processing Note that once transferred to a computer NEF RAW images can only be viewed using compatible software such as ViewNxX supplied pg 238 or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388 Record uncompressed TIFF RGB images at a bit TIFF RGB TIFF depth of 8 bits per channel 24 bit color TIFF is RGB supported by a wide variety of imaging applications JPEG fine Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine image quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal image quality JPEG basic Record JPEG images ata compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic image quality NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG fine and one fine quality JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG normal JPEG and one normal quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image JPEG basic and one basic qua
24. Description Aperture setting At the default setting of Sub command dial aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Live view is not available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with an aperture ring is attached Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached Menus and playback At the default setting of Off the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down The sub command dial is used to display additional photo information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press the center of the multi selector or
25. RETOUCH MENU D ishting Redeye correction Y Trim Bi Filter effects Color balance Image overlay 2 Selecta picture The pictures on the memory card will be displayed Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button 351 352 3 Display retouch options Black andwhite Press to display retouch options see a the section for the selected option for b details To exit without creating a AXO retouched copy press MENU Oa Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon m Retouching Copies Copies created with Trim can not be further modified D lighting red eye correction filter effects and color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies Image overlay can be applied multiple times Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to existing copies although multiple edits may result in loss of detail Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim pg 356 and Image overlay copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images and copies created from TIFF RGB photos are saved as fine quality JPEG images of the same size as the original Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JP
26. Start printing Page size Border Time stamp 5 Adjust printing options a Sew Press A or W to highlight an Start printing Page size option and press to select Border Time stamp Option Description Menu of page size options will be displayed pg 247 Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of border options will be displayed pg 247 Press A or F to choose print style from Printer default Border default for current printer Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of time stamp options will be displayed pg 247 Press A or W to choose Printer default default for current printer Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press amp to select and return to previous menu Page size Time stamp 6 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Page Size Border Time Stamp and Cropping Choose printer default to print at current printer settings Only options supported by the current printer can be selected Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes See Also See page 415 for information on what to do if a
27. Can be selected from Auto High Normal or Low Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 3500FX autofocus module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo e Autofocus Single servo AF S continuous servo AF 0 predictive focus tracking automatically activated according to subject status e Manual M Electronic range finding supported Focus point Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF dynamic area AF auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button Flash Built in flash Manual pop up with button release and a Guide Number of 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 12 39 or 18 59 in manual mode m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F GN at ISO 100 is 13 43 431 Flash Flash control e TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 1 005 segment RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB 400 Auto aperture Available with SB 900 SB 800 and CPU lens e Non TTL auto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22s e Distance priority manual Available with SB 900 and SB 800 Flas
28. Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lens are specified using Non CPU lens data item in setup menu see page 211 center weighted metering is used if focal length or aperture is not specified See Also For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center weighted metering see Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 294 For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 294 113 114 Exposure Mode Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture when adjusting exposure Four modes are available programmed auto F shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A and manual M Mode Description Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for Programmed i p taito optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots i og 116 and in other situations in which there is little time p9 to adjust camera settings Shutter priority User chooses shutter speed camera selects 5 auto aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur pg 118 motion User chooses aperture camera selects shutter Aperture ie speed for best results Use to blur background for A priority auto pg 119 portraits or bring both foreground and background into focus for landscape shots User controls both shutter speed an
29. 325 f7 AE L AF L button press AE AF lock AE L AF L command dials None Shutter spd amp aperture lock pg 326 f8 Shutter speed lock Off Aperture lock Off Customize command dials pg 326 Reverse rotation pg 326 No f9 Change main sub pg 326 Off Aperture setting pg 327 Sub command dial Menus and playback pg 327 Off f10 Release button to use dial pg 328 No f11 No memory card pg 329 Enable release f12 Reverse indicators pg 330 tebe Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV SDCFX4 card at different image quality image size and image area settings EE FX Format 36 x 24 Image Area Image quality Image size Filesize No of images 2 Buffer capacity NEF RAW Lossless compressed 12 bit 133MB 199 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit 16 3 MB i a9 NEF RAW _ Compressed 12 bit TROMB 138 ae NEF RAW Compressed 14 bit 1S EME 114 23 NEF RAW Uncompressed T 18 8 MB 100 19 12 bit NEF RAW Uncompressed 24 7 MB 77 17 14 bit L 35 9 MB 53 17 TIFF RGB M 20 7 MB 95 20 S 10 0 MB 211 28 L 5 7 MB 279 100 JPEG fine 4 M 3 2 MB 496 100 S 1 4 MB 1000 100 L 2 9 MB 548 100 JPEG normal M 1 6 MB 976 100 S 0 7 MB 2000 100 L 1 4 MB 1000 100 JPEG basic 4 M 0 8 MB 1800 100 S 0 4 MB 3900 100
30. Front 5 Turn the camera on pg 46 For information on choosing a language and setting the time and date see page 38 See page 45 for information on adjusting viewfinder focus 22 6 Check camera settings pp 46 49 26455 3J m oy ET White balance Aa Ge Control panel Viewfinder display 7 Select single servo autofocus pp 51 72 Rotate the focus mode selector to single servo autofocus 8 Focus and shoot pp 53 54 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus then press the shutter release button the rest of the way E down to take the photograph Focus indicator 9 View the photograph pg 55 10 Delete unwanted photos pg 56 Press twice to delete the current photograph best button 10080709 95 0091 NORMA 23 24 Tutorial This section describes how to use the camera menus how to ready the camera for use and how to take your first pictures and play them back EIPSt STE E E O E pg 32 Ghargecthe Baterya neee aeaa AE aa AE AEA pg 32 Insert the Battery Atac maleni eoi ne ie A RRS BaSiG Seu Oea E E E E Insert A Menmo Card keie a E A N pg 41 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS sccccssscssssccssccsssecsstecsssccsseecsnecesnecesnecesee pg 45 Basic Photography and Playback ssossssossoscscoscsscscsee pg 46 25 Camera Menus Most shooting playback a
31. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described below Shooting Menu Bank The current shooting menu bank is shown in the shooting information display which can be viewed by pressing the ff button The shooting menu bank can also be selected from the ile shooting information display pg 15 Bia A ODD SSS dy ABT BE Renaming Shooting Menu Banks Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1 1 Select a bank GB Shooting menu bank i Rename Highlight the desired bank and press b gt 269 270 2 Entera name Keyboard area A Shooting menu bark To move the cursor in the name F OEE area press the 9H button and AAI Sth press lt or gt To enter a new wnogorstuvwxyzt letter at the current cursor e position use the multi selector Glint K to highlight the desired Name area character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the butto
32. press and hold the amp button If the copy was created from two images using Image overlay press A or W to view the other source image To exit to playback mode press the gt button To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed press or the center of the multi selector Source Retouched image copy m Side by Side Comparison The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has since been deleted is currently protected pg 235 or hidden pg 263 or contains embedded image authentication information pg 342 363 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized list of options from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus for quick access up to 20 items If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 368 Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below For information on basic menu operations see Tutorial Camera Menus pg 26 Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items MY MENU Image quality In My Menu i highlight Add G NEE GAN records items and press gt He t5 Assign FUNC button T Remove items Rank items El Choose tab 2 Select a menu i Add items Highlight the name of the CE Playback menu sce T Y menu containing the option A 2 Custom setting menu Setup men you wish to add and press gt E a Retouch
33. with an image area picture angle equivalent to a 35 mm 135 format film E anans a camera Image area is selected using the Image area option in the shooting menu At the default setting of Auto DX crop the camera will automatically crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is attached The Choose image area option can be used to select a 35 mm picture angle BE Auto DX Crop Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens is attached al Auto DX crop ON gt Option Description On Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is default attached Off Crop selected for Choose image area is used BE Choose Image Area Choose the image area used when Off is selected for Auto DX crop pg 61 Option Description Images are recorded in FX format using the full area of the image sensor 36 0 x 23 9 mm producing a picture angle equivalent to a Nikkor lens ona 35 mm format camera The edges of pictures taken with DX format lenses will be blacked out FX format 36x24 An area at the center of the image sensor 23 5 x 15 6 mm shown by the DX format crop _ DX format N the viewfinder is used to xs 24x16 record pictures in DX format To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format multiply by 1 5 DX format crop The DX Format Crop If Auto the default setting or On is selected for Custom Set
34. 1 440 1 200 x 960 896 x 720 608 x 480 Monochrome Copy photographs in Black and white E Monochrome Sepia or Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Y a Sepia Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype Increase displays a preview of the selected saturation image press A to increase color lt 4 gt saturation W to decrease Press 4 D to create a monochrome copy as Decrease saturation 357 Filter Effects Choose from the following color filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Skylight Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Color Balance Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms pg 223 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Press 9 to copy the photograph Increase amount of green Increase KEA Increase amount of Or amount of lHo blue amber Increase amount of magenta Creating JPEG Copies of NEF RAW Pictures To create a JPEG copy of an NEF RAW picture select the NEF RAW picture for Color balance and press without modifying c
35. 17 14 7 down 7 down a 60AN 90 up 90 up 90 up toward lenis Head rotation z 180 left 90 up light axis 45 180 left 180 left 90 right up away from and right 90 right light axis If a color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or 4 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 900 SB 800 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 with standard illumination 4 27mm zoom coverage 5 24mm zoom coverage SU 800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35 mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two approximately 1 4 379 The following features are available w
36. 1x Y44 Y48 Y52 056 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 Water guards Water Guard WG AS3 Covers the base of the optional SB 900 flash unit to protect the camera accessory shoe from water droplets Optional flash units e Nikon Speedlights SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 e Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB R200 e Wireless Speedlight Commander SU 800 See page 378 for more information PC card adapters e PC Card Adapter EC AD1 The EC AD1 PC card adapter allows Type CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots 387 Software e Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk e Image Authentication Determine whether photographs taken with image authentication pg 342 on have been modified after shooting Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet Body cap Body Cap The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place 388 The D700 is equipped with a ten pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic TEE photography The terminal is aoe provided with a cap which protects the contacts when the termi
37. 342 28 Color SPaCenseresssessesssesseenseenee 181 2 Elis displayed if FX format 36 x 24 was selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu If DX format 24 x 16 was selected will be displayed in yellow Ca 231 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four or nine images press the 9 button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback 232 The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are displayed To Use Description Press 9E button to zoom out Display more Qe from one to four images per page images Press again to display nine images per page Press amp button to zoom in from Display fewer Q nine to four images per page images Press again to display highlighted image full frame Toggle full frame playback Press center of multi selector to switch back and forth between full frame and thumbnail playback Highlight images Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom pg 234 or deletion pg 236 Delete highlighted See page 236 for more EE photo E information Change protect See page 235 for more Status of om ae n highlighted photo i Return to shooting F Io Monitor will turn off Photographs mode can be taken immediately Display menus MENU See page 259 for more information See A
38. 5 minutes or 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life Regardless of the setting chosen the monitor remains on if no operations are performed for about ten minutes when the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter Option es 2s O5s 5s Oils 10 s default As 20s Option OAs 4s Dils 10 s default 20s im 1 min 5m 5 min in 10 min 297 d Shooting Display d1 Beep Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self timer is used or the camera focuses in single servo autofocus note that a beep will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 284 Option Description High Choose the pitch of the beep default from High and Low A J icon is displayed in the control panel and shooting information displays H AL Low Off Turn the beep speaker off d2 Viewfinder Grid Display Choose whether on demand grid lines are displayed in the viewfinder for reference when composing photographs Option Description On On demand grid lines displayed except when DX format 24 x 16 is selected for Image area Off default On demand grid lines not displayed d3 Screen Tips Choose whether to show on screen tips for items selected in the shooting display Option Description On default Tips displayed
39. 8G ED e AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF I 400mm f 2 8D ED e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 1 Autofocus not supported 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E Il Lens f number The f number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens 371 Non CPU Lenses Non CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses without a built in CPU The following is a list of compatible non CPU lenses and accessories camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode Salama pa la c electronic M s M 3p col Lens accessory rangefinder pate Al Al modified Nikkor or _ foes 5 Nikon Series E lenses v aa Medical Nikkor 120mm f 4 Y Vv v Reflex Nikkor Y vt Iv PC Nikkor v3 Vi W v Al type Teleconverter v Y vt ivii y PB 6 Bellows Focusing A Attachment v lala fcc Auto extension rings PK j series 11A 12 or 13 PN 11 EEEE ae Some lenses can not be used pg 373 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 ED is mounted on camera 3 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster If maximum aperture is specified using Non CPU lens data pg 210 aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and control pan
40. A i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 900 and SB 800 flash AA units Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel TTL TTL Group B Channel 311 312 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted in mode i 03 Flash entri for built in flash Commander mode W Built in flash oy Group A Group B Channel Move Mode TIL TIL cH Comp OSet CHOK 2 Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A E 03 Flash entel for built in flash Commander mode W Built in flash E Group A Group B Channel Move Set 3 Adjust settings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B E 03
41. Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting High 179 180 To use active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting SHOOTING MENU c NEF RAW recording Bj In the shooting menu pg 268 I sec Pitre contre 390 highlight Active D lighting AR obei A Active Diohtin n and press gt s Manet control ON El Long exp NR OFF 2 Choose an option By Active Dlishting a Highlight Auto Off Low soa Normal or High and press WRN Normal wL low Choose Auto to let the camera adjust D Lighting automatically according to shooting conditions M Active D Lighting When Active D Lighting is on additional time will be required to record images and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop pg 424 Use matrix metering pg 112 Noise grains banding mottling may appear in photographs taken with Active D Lighting at high ISO sensitivities Active D Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 or above The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings pg 165 can not be adjusted while active D Lighting is in effect In exposure mode M an Active D Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal M Active D Lighting versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after shooting The Shooting Information Display Active D Ligh
42. All functions supported PC Micro Nikkor does not support some functions IX Nikkor lenses not supported Other AF Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P Nikkor All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il e Non CPU Can be used in exposure modes A and M electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s in steps of 1 3 2 or 1 EV bulb X250 Flash sync speed X 1 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 250 and 320 s Release Release mode S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed live view self timer Mup mirror up 429 430 Release Frame advance rate e With EN EL3e From 1 to up to 5 fps CL up to 5 fps CH e With optional MB D10 multi power battery pack and EN EL4a EN EL4 or AA batteries or with optional EH 5a EH 5 AC adapter From 1 to up to 7 fps CL up to 8 fps CH Self timer Can be selected from 2 5 10 and 20 s duration Exposure Metering TTL exposure metering using 1 005 segment RGB sensor Metering method e Matrix 3D color matrix mete
43. E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display 6 PictBridge 245 246 EE Printing Pictures One at a Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures or press the amp button to zoom in on the current frame pg 234 To view six pictures at a time press the 9 button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp to display the highlighted picture full frame 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options Start printing Page size No of copies Border Time stamp Cropping 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press to select Option Description Menu shown at right will be a Page ste displayed Press A or to Printer default choose page size to print at vere Page size default page size for current Ad printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or W to No of choose number of copies copies maximum 99 then press to select an
44. EV 1 2 EV or 4 2 1 2 step 1 EV 1 1step b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntr This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV Option Description Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments equivalent to 3 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV 1 3 step 13 default Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 2 EV The bracketing increment can be selected from 2 and 1 EV Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments 1 Tstep equivalent to 1 EV The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV b3 Exp Comp Fine Tune This option determines whether Option adjustments to exposure and flash 1 3 1 3 step default compensation are made in increments 1 2 1 2 step equivalent to 1 3 EV 1 2 EV or 1 EV 1 1step b4 Easy Exposure Compensation This option controls whether the 4 button is needed to set exposure compensation pg 128 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting Ta On selected using the command dial is reset when the Auto reset camera or exposure meters turn off exposure com
45. Flash entel for built in flash Commander mode W Built in flash oy Group A Group B Channel Move Mode TIL 4 Select the channel T 03 Flash contri for built in flash Commander mode a W Built in flash ty Group A Group B Channel Move Mode Comp oa LM E Oset OK 5 Press 6 Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions Wireless remote 60 or less 5 m 15 ft or sensors on flash et w ee less units should face or es je camera Sj Camera fbuilt in flash 30 or less A eae or Remote flash 4 less 60 or less 7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the Speedlight instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the flash pop up button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock pg 192 can be used if desired 313 314 The Flash Syn
46. If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel M Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 296 The default setting is six seconds Preset d 0 The new value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored pg 153 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 140 and press gt iy White balance ca Incandesce
47. L command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd aperture option The Shooting Information Display The role of the AE L AF L button can also be selected in the shooting information display pg 15 325 f8 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock Use this option to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode or to lock aperture at the value selected in aperture priority auto or manual exposure mode Lock is not available in programmed auto exposure mode Option Description Shutter speed lock Choose On to lock shutter speed Off the default option to unlock Aperture lock Choose On to lock aperture Off the default option to unlock f9 Customize Command Dials This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials Option Description Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No the Reverse default option for normal command dial operation or Yes to rotation reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 Change main sub At the default setting of Off the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls aperture If Onis selected the main command dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D10 326 Option
48. Memory Card 1 Select Load save In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Load save and press P By Manage Picture Control a Save edit Rename Delete at Load sve 4 Select Delete from card Highlight Delete from card and press gt GB Manage Picture Control _ e Load save Copy to camera Delete from card Copy to card z 177 178 3 Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control slot1 through 99 and either e press to view current Picture Control settings or e press to display confirmation dialog shown at right Manase Picture Control _ E Delete from car 101 STANDARD 02 102 NEUTRAL 02 03 WONOCHROUE 02 OX i 3Confirm o Sharpening Contrast 7 Brightness 0 H Filter effects orr Toning va Cyanotype 4 B rid GR Done iy Manage Picture Control E Delete from card Delete Picture Control Y UONOCHRONE 02 LGJ 4 Select Yes Highlight Yes and press to delete the selected Picture Control iy Manage Picture Control g Delete from card F Delete Picture Control WONOCHROWE 02 Active D Lighting Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day Active D Lighting Auto
49. My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu highlight Rank items and press gt 2 Select an item i Rank items Image quality Norai Highlight the item you wish to Hae move and press Select items 3 Position the item Ba Rank items Image quality Press Aor to move the He item up or down in My Menu By EAn FUNC batten and press Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items 367 Displaying Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab MY MENU Image quality In My Menu highlight NEE OA cri Choose tab and press gt Ha T Remove items Rank items z 2 Choose tab RCI 2 Select Recent Settings E Choose tab Highlight Recent settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS 2 EER ION tut FSS Recent settings Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu again select My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab 368 Technical Notes Camera Care Options and Resources This chapter covers the following topics Compatible Lenses irscaccccecsecsscscscrecscceseccecossesezsssececsers pg 370 Optional Flash Units Speedlights sssceeseee pg 377 Other Accessories eneore eeaeee Aeaeeia e neess pg 385 Caring for the Camera cc
50. Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the 9 button to return to the Picture Control menu Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting settings 166 Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Yellow Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness Orange of the sky in landscape photographs Orange produces more Red contrast than yellow red more contrast than orange A D o lt Green Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing W when Toning is selected displays E Monochrome saturation options Press lt or gt to adjust sharpening saturation Saturation control is not available
51. The comment is also visible on the third page of the photo information display e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 270 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to attach the comment to all subsequent photographs Attach comment can be Y Done turned on and off by highlighting it and ne pressing gt E mage comment 335 336 Auto Image Rotation Photographs taken while On the default option is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback pg 265 or when viewed in ViewNxX or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388 The following orientations are recorded Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 265 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 219 Dust off Ref Photo Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX
52. _ records photographs in continuous low speed or CH Continuous continuous high speed mode pg 87 high speed Select Live view In the shooting menu pg 268 highlight Live view and press P o SHOOTING MENU e Active Dlighting Vignette control y Long exo NR High ISO NR A 150 sensitivity settings ba Live view Multiple exposure El Interval timer shooting Select Live view mode Highlight Live view mode and press gt E Live view a ual Live view mode a gt d E Release mode Select a live view mode Highlight the desired mode and press to return to the live view menu pp Live view Gy Live view mode METi O amp Tripod 91 p 92 4 Select Release mode Highlight Release mode and press b gt pp Live view a Y Live view mode P H Release mode 2 5 Selecta release mode Highlight the release mode that will be during live view and press ey Live view E Release mode Y S Sinole frame Gh Cv Continuous low speed Cu Continuous high speed 6 Exitto shooting mode Press the shutter release button halfway to exit the menus and return to shooting mode Hand Held Mode 1 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to Release mode dial 2 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror wi
53. automatic playback slide Slide show 266 show option Retouching Photographs Question Key phrase See page How do I bring out details in shadows in backlit areas or areas outside the range D Lighting 354 of the flash Can I get rid of red eye Red eye correction 355 Can I crop photographs on the camera Trim 356 Can I create a monochrome copy of a Monochr me 357 photograph Can I create a copy with different colors Filter effects 358 Question Key phrase See page Can use the camera to create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs Color balance 338 Can l overlay two photos to make a Image overlay 359 single image Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices Question Key phrase See page Can I view my photos on TV Television playback 255 Can I view my photos in High HDMI 257 Definition Connecting to a How do I copy photos to my computer computer 238 How do I print photographs Printing photographs 243 Can I print photos without a computer Printing via USB 244 Can print the date on my photographs Time stamp 247 How do order professional prints Print set DPOF 253 Optional Accessories Question Key phrase See page What optional flash units Speedlights Optional flash units 377 can use What lenses can I use Compatible lenses 370 What AC adapters battery packs remote cords and
54. available separately see pg 389 is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode it will activate contrast detect autofocus If the remote cord shutter release button is pressed all the way down without focusing focus will not be adjusted before the picture is taken 101 Self Timer Mode The self timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits To use the self timer mount the camera on a tripod recommended or place the camera on a stable level surface and follow the steps below 1 Select self timer mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to AA Release mode dial p 2 Frame the photograph and focus In single servo autofocus pg Focus mode selector 72 photographs can only be M ID taken if the in focus indicator appears in the LLG 1B viewfinder Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure 102 3 Start the timer N Press the shutter release button all the way down to start the timer The self timer lamp AF assist illuminator will start to blink and a beep will begin to sound Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will become more rapid
55. changed in live view mode Choose a metering method before selecting live view mode Live view mode can be used for up to an hour Note however that when used in live view mode for extended periods the camera may become noticeably warm and the temperature of its internal circuits may rise resulting in image noise AM and unusual colors To prevent damage to the P 125 56 200591 camera s internal circuits live view shooting will end automatically before the camera overheats A count down display will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends At high ambient temperatures this display may appear immediately when live view mode is selected Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure To reduce blur in tripod mode choose On for Custom Setting d9 Exposure delay mode pg 302 Monitor Brightness Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing the gt button while the view through the monitor is displayed Press A or W to adjust brightness note that monitor brightness has no effect on pictures taken in live view mode To return to live Sa A r view release the P button m P ies ss ecas HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right Remote Cords If the shutter release button on a remote cord
56. delete multiple images use the Delete option in the playback menu pg 262 The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted pg 265 236 Connections Connecting to External Devices This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer how to print pictures and how to view them on a television set Connecting to a COMPUTED sessesesossssssosososesescosososssesso pg 238 Direct USB CONNECCION nieee a naea A E ARE AEN A AES pg 240 Wireless and Ethernet Networks sss sssssssssssssssssssssesesssssteessssse pg 242 Printing Photographs essssessossoscsscscsscssseossosossoscososeos pg 243 DireGhUSBiGONNECON eaaa aA E A REE RREA pg 244 Viewing Photographs on TV ssssssssscsscscsecseosossosoososeos pg 255 Standard Definition Devices ssss es ssssssssssessessssssssseesreseessssssss pg 255 High Definition Devices ssescsssscssseccsseccseccssscceseccessecsnecesssceess pg 257 237 238 Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E4 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before connecting the camera install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software Suite CD see the Install Guide for more information Nikon Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected and is used to copy photographs to the computer where they can be viewed using ViewNX Nik
57. eescesssessccesseescccnsseesenene 108 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES sesssscsssccsecssecsscesseeseerss 47 When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted 1 The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction 11 12 The Shooting Information Display Shooting information including shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining buffer capacity and AF area mode is displayed in the monitor when the ff button is pressed Press the HJ button again to change selected settings pg 15 To clear shooting information from the monitor press the M button a third time or button press the shutter release button halfway At default settings the monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 297 For information on changing the color of the lettering in the shooting information display see Custom Setting d7 Shooti
58. exposure meters If Do nothing the default option is selected the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector is pressed 319 320 f4 Photo Info Playback At the default setting of Info A W Playback lt P gt pressing A or Y in full frame playback changes the photo information displayed while pressing lt or gt displays additional images To reverse the role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing A or W displays additional images and pressing lt or gt changes the photo information displayed select Info lt q gt PlaybackAV This setting also applies to the multi selector on the optional MB D10 battery pack f5 Assign FUNC Button Choose the role played by the Fn button either by itself FUNC button press or when used in combination with the command dials FUNC button dials The Shooting Information Display The role of the Fn button can also be selected in the shooting information display pg 15 EE FUNC Button Press Selecting FUNC button press for Custom Setting f5 displays the following options Option Description Preview Press the Fn button to preview depth of field pg 115 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash 7 and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 EMiloct flash units only pg 192 Press again to cancel FV lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is A AE AF lock pressed M AE lock only Exposure locks
59. f number bula buLaselectedin EPan9e shutter speed i or select manual 118 121 blinks exposure mode 5 exposure mode 411 412 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page 5 Optional flash unit that Change flash mode a does not support i TTL ing on optional 381 blinks flash control attached flash 9 it p blinks and set to TTL ee If indicator blinks for 3s check photo m after flash fires photo monitor if 427 blinks may be underexposed underexposed adjust settings and try again Memory insufficient to Reduce quality or 64 69 Euth Fup record further photos SIZE blinks blinks at current settings or Delete photographs 262 camera has run out of e Insert new memory 41 file or folder numbers card Release shutter If error persists or appears blinks Camera malfunction frequently consult Nikon authorized service representative Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Noiimeior Camera cannot Turn camera off and Y E detect memory confirm that card is 41 card card correctly inserted e Error accessing Use Nikon 390 This memory memory card approved card card cannot e Check that contacts be used are clean If card is EHA Card may be blink damaged contact damaged blinks retailer or Nikon Insert representative another card e Unable to create e
60. for portraits Center weight area Spot Camera meters circle 4 mm in diameter approximately 1 5 of frame Circle is mot centered on current focus point o making it possible to meter off center aja subjects if non CPU lens is used or if Auto area AF is in effect pg 74 camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker Spot metering area 1 When non CPU lens pg 372 is attached average for entire frame will be used if Average is selected for Custom Setting b5 otherwise center weighted metering for non CPU lenses will use 12 mm circle in center of viewfinder regardless of setting selected for Non CPU lens data 2 For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu pg 211 3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder To choose a metering method Metering selector rotate the metering selector until zuo a the desired mode is displayed B ee 25 r55 e 3D Color Matrix II Metering In matrix metering exposure is set using a 1005 segment RGB sensor Use a type Gor D lens for results that include range information 3D color matrix metering II see page 370 for information on lens types With other CPU lenses 3D range information is not included color matrix metering Il
61. for Customers in the U S A e Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product e While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area address provided separately Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the r
62. for printing using Print set DPOF pg 253 e Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network computer using the WT 4 wireless transmitter available separately see the WT 4 user s manual for details e Transfer pictures pg 238 and print them from a computer using ViewNxX supplied pg 238 or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388 Note that this is the only method available for printing RAW NEF pictures TIFF Photographs TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer Some digital print services may also support TIFF check with the service before ordering 243 244 Direct USB Connection If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied USB cable selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the camera Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF pg 253 Connect camera to printer pg 245 Print photographs Print multiple one ata time photographs pg 246 pg 249 Create index prints pg 252 l Disconnect USB cable M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB pg 181 BE Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC
63. forward or back If the camera is unable to measure the tilt angle the display will flash BE FUNC Button Dials Selecting FUNC button dials for Custom Setting f5 displays the following options Option Description Choose Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to faa choose the image area pg 58 Not available image area A while a multiple exposure is being recorded Lock shutter speed modes S and M or aperture Shutter spd modes A and M Press the Fn button and rotate HON amp aperture the main command dial to lock or unlock shutter lock speed press the Fn button and rotate the sub command dial to toggle lock or unlock aperture If the Fn button is pressed when the command RO 1stepspd dials are rotated changes to shutter speed i aperture exposure modes S and M and aperture exposure modes A and M are made in increments of 1 EV Choose non Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to Non PU CPU lens choose a lens number specified using the Non number CPU lens data option Press the Fn button and rotate the main command Auto dial to choose the number of shots in the BKT bracketing bracketing program Press the Fn button and default rotate the sub command dial to select bracketing increment If continuous servo AF focus mode G pg 72 is selected when dynamic area AF J is chosen for Dynamic AF ti AF area mode pg 74 the number of focus points area s can be sel
64. iteminMy MENU Select this option for quick access to a Menu frequently used menu item Press the Fn button to toggle live view on and off Live view a 99E IVE NVIEW9 Not available when the mode dial is set to amp or Mup 321 322 Option Description If image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again RW NEF RAW Virtual The electronic analog exposure displays act as a tilt horizon meter pg 322 None No operation is performed when the Fn button is default pressed This option can not be used in combination with FUNC button dials pg 323 Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC button dials to None If another option is selected for FUNC button dials while this setting is active FUNC button press will be set to None Virtual Horizon When Virtual horizon is selected for FUNC button press the electronic analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and control panel act as a horizontal level when the Fn button is pressed Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left Control panel Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle
65. lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu pg 211 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops 4F with maximum aperture displayed as AF2 and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring M Manual In manual exposure mode you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in manual exposure mode 1 Select exposure MODE button mode Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and control Main command dial panel 121 122 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set x 25a or to values between 30 s and 1 8 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure ties hi Pg 124 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens Check exposure in the electronic analog exposure displays see page 123 and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is achieved Sub command dial Setting aperture Setting shutter speed Ls e5o sa 2d Main command dial 3 Frame a p
66. meu 3 Select anitem Be Additems Shooting menu bank Highlight the desired menu B Aetna fonera item and press e Image size Image area JPEG compression 364 4 Position the new item BB Choose position Mince G Press A or W to move the new Da item up or down in My Menu a 5 Assign FUNC button a Press to add the new item 5 view My Menu E Add items Shooting menu bank The items currently displayed in My D a Menu are indicated by a check mark Sina al Items indicated by a N icon can not be ae selected Repeat steps 1 4 to select JPEG compression additional items 365 366 Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu 1 highlight Remove items and press gt 2 Select items E Remove items Done Highlight items and press gt to E ase ly select or deselect Selected O NE RAM cords items are indicated by a check EEOAE mark 3 Select Done Gy Remove items 5 Highlight Done and press A C Imane aut confirmation dialog will be Spline displayed O 5Assign FUNC button 4 Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected ED Delete selected item items ia Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the tf button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press tt again to remove the selected item from My Menu Reordering Options in
67. mode upload Control camera from computer using Camera Control PC mode Pro 2 available separately Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network Print mode computer For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT 4 firmware and supplied software 1 Transfer Mode When Wireless transmitter gt Mode gt Transfer mode is selected in the camera setup menu the button is used during playback to select pictures for upload preventing it from being used to select pictures for other operations such as side by side comparison pg 362 To restore normal operation select another option for Wireless transmitter gt Mode WT 4A B C D E The principal difference between the WT 4 and WT 4A B C D E is in the number of channels supported unless otherwise stated all references to the WT 4 also apply to the WT 4A B C D E Printing Photographs Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods e Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs directly from the camera pg 244 e Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card slot see the printer manual for details If the printer supports DPOF pg 435 photographs can be selected for printing using Print set DPOF pg 253 e Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer center If the center supports DPOF pg 435 photographs can be selected
68. number frame number Z esseessessseesseees 272 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 264 2 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu 227 BE Shooting Data Page 4 COPYRI GHT NIKON NI 1 Protect Status cccesseecseeees 235 5 Camera name 2 Retouch indicator 349 6 Folder number 3 Name of photographer 343 frame number 2 ssssssssssssrserssee 272 4 Copyright holder esse 343 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 264 and copyright information was appended to photograph pg 343 2 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu 228 EE GPS Data 3 LATITUDE N 35 36 371 4 LONGITUDE 4 E 139 43 696 5 ALTITUDE 35m 6 TIME UTC 15 07 2008 10 02 27 7 HEADING 105 07 1 Protect Status cesses 235 6 Coordinated Universal Time 2 Retouch indicator 349 UTC 3 Latitude 7 Heading 4 Longitude 8 Camera name 5 Altitude 9 Folder number frame nuUMber sssssssssssseresesssee 272 1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken pg 213 2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass 3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu 229 HE Overvie
69. of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also See page 375 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist a10 AF On for MB D10 Choose the function assigned to the AF ON button on the optional MB D10 battery pack E B Option Description AF ON Pressing the MB D10 AF ON button initiates AF ON default autofocus i AE AF lock Focus and exposure lock while the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed fia AE lock only Exposure locks while the MB D10 AF 0N button is pressed AE lock Reset on release he Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time the shutter is released or the exposure meters turn off 3 AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the MB D10 AF ON button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fia AF lock only Focus locks while the MB D10 AF 0N button is pressed Same as FUNC button The MB D10 AF ON button performs the function selected for Custom Setting f5 pg 320 1 The AF 0N Button Pressing the AF ON button will not activate vibration reduction when a VR lens is attached 291 292 b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value This option determines whether Option adjustments to sensitivity are made in 1 3 1 3 step default increments equivalent to 1 3
70. options can not be combined with options using dials The explanation that follows assumes that bracketing is assigned to the Fn button EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing 1 Select flash or exposure bracketing Auto bracketing set Choose the type of bracketing to be 40 performed using Custom Setting e5 aie aaa Auto bracketing set pg 315 Choose Pak AE amp flash to vary both exposure and flash level the default setting AE only to vary only exposure or Flash only to vary only flash level 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel Se of shots Fn button Main command Control panel dial Exposure and flash bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a Hai icon I and exposure and flash bracketing W255 TE indicator will be displayed in the control panel and a 4 icon will blink in the viewfinder 131 132 3 Select an exposure increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the exposure increment Exposure increment Sub command Control panel dial At default settings the size of the increment can be chosen from 1 3 2 3 and 1 EV The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 3 EV are listed below Control pa
71. other banks are unaffected 420 Option Default d1 Beep pg 298 High d2 Viewfinder grid display pg 298 Off d3 Screen tips pg 298 On d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 299 3 fps d5 Max continuous release pg 299 100 d6 File number sequence pg 300 On d7 Shooting info display pg 301 Auto d8 LCD illumination pg 302 Off d9 Exposure delay mode pg 302 Off d10 MB D10 battery type pg 302 LR6 AA alkaline d11 Battery order pg 304 Use MB D10 batteries first e1 Flash sync speed pg 305 1 250 s e2 Flash shutter speed pg 308 1 60 s e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 309 TTL e4 Modeling flash pg 315 On e5 Auto bracketing set pg 315 AE amp flash e6 Auto bracketing Mode M pg 316 Flash speed e7 Bracketing order pg 317 MTR gt under gt over 421 Option Default f1 8 switch pg 318 LCD backlight 8 Multi selector center button pg 318 f2 Shooting mode Select center focus point Playback mode Thumbnail on off f3 Multi selector pg 319 Do nothing f4 Photo info playback pg 320 Info Playback Assign FUNC button pg 320 f5 FUNC button press None FUNC button dials Auto bracketing Assign preview button pg 324 f6 Preview button press Preview Preview command dials None Assign AE L AF L button pg
72. pg 268 141 142 Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Choose a color temperature use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 315 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance See page 130 for more information Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the s
73. photograph for example when measuring preset white balance Calibration This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack equipped with an EN EL4a or EN EL4 battery available separately e CAL Due to repeated use and recharging calibration is required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately recalibrate battery before charging e Calibration not required Charging life A five level display showing battery age O 1E indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the charging life display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D10 Battery Pack The information displayed when the camera is BS Battery info powered by an optional MB D10 battery pack MD nat metr a oe depends on the type of batteries used y Picmeter 209 143 4 me Charging life 0 0 4 lt Bat meter Pic meter Calibration Charging life EN EL3e Vv Vv Vv EN EL4a EN EL4 option Vv Vv Vv Vv 8 x AA option Vv Wireless Transmitter This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless network using an optional WT 4 wireless transm
74. recompose the photograph and shoot Metered Area In spot metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 4 mm 0 16 in circle centered on the selected focus point In center weighted metering exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of the viewfinder the default area for center weighted metering is an 12 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be changed without altering the metered value for exposure Exposure mode Settings P Shutter speed and aperture flexible program pg 117 5 Shutter speed A Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect changes to metering take effect when the lock is released See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 296 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 127 Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pictures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering see page 112 In exposure mode M only the
75. reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can Image Dust Off option not be used with photographs taken in Capture NX 2 does fteri leaning 337 ot haved sired after image sensor cleaning is effect performed Dust off reference data 5 recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed Computer displays Third party software does not display NEF RAW images effects of Picture Controls active D differently from lighting or vignette control Use camera Capture NX 2 available separately c N The camera is not compatible with an not copy picture Windows 2000 Professional Use card to computer using _ Nikon Transfer reader to copy pictures from memory card HE Miscellaneous Problem Solution Page Date OF recordings Set camera clock 38 not correct Some options are not available at certain F combinations of settings or when no Menu item caniniot be memory card is inserted Note that Battery 340 selected info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional AC adapter Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Lens aperture ringis Set ring to minimum FEE wa not set to minimum aperture largest 37 blinks aperture f number
76. required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Plug the charger in Insert the AC adapter plug into the battery charger and plug the power cable into an electrical outlet 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 32 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery into the charger The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges 4 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Remove the battery and unplug the charger 33 34 Insert the Battery 1 Turn the camera off Power switch Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Open the battery chamber cover Open the battery chamber cover on the DA bottom of the camera 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery as shown at right 4 Close the battery chamber cover EE Removing the Battery Before removing the battery turn the camera off To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use M The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii xx and 398 401 of this manual To prevent short circuits replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in use Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F C
77. selector center button see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button pg 318 77 78 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition It can also be used when the autofocus system is unable to focus pg 80 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus J N point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus 2 Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder Single servo AF Focus will lock automatically when the in focus indicator appears and remain locked v until you remove your finger g y from the shutter release button Pressing the AE L AF L button while the shutter release button is pressed halfway will lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon appears in the viewfinder when exposure is locked see page 126 See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 296 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Continuous servo AF Press the AE L AF L button to lock both focus and exposure an AE L icon appears in the viewfinder see page 126 Focus and exposure will remain locked while the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the Shutter release shutter release button button
78. settings bracketing How do adjust white balance White balance 139 Can take pictures with a flash Flash photography flash 185 de red How can reduce red eye Dee ee 188 reduction How can record multiple shots as a 7 single photograph Multiple exposure 198 How do I reduce loss of brightness at the edges of photographs Vignettecontrol 278 Can pick the standard exposure level Fine tune optimal 294 exposure How can I reduce blur Exposure delay mode 302 Can the flash be used at shutter speeds faster than 1 250 s Flash sync speed 30 gt Can I record an NEF copy of a photograph while shooting JPEG NEF RAW 322 images vii viii Viewing Photographs Question Key phrase See page Can y my photographs on the Camera playback 218 camera Can I view more information about Photo info 220 photos Why do parts of my photos blink Photo info highlights 222 264 How do I get rid of an unwanted photo Deleting individual 236 photos Can I delete several photos at once Delete 262 Can Zoom in on pictures to make sure Playback zoom 234 they re in focus Can protect photos from accidental Protect 235 deletion Can I hide selected photos Hide image 263 How do tell if parts of my photos may Display mode ee pais 264 be overexposed highlights How do tell where the camera focused ae mods eee 264 Can view photos as they are taken Image review 265 Is ee an
79. situations In programmed auto and aperture priority auto modes shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1 250 and 1 eo s 8 000 to 1 60 s when an optional flash unit is used with Auto FP High Speed Sync pg 377 1I Red eye reduction Red eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one second before main flash Pupils in subject s eyes to contract reducing red eye effect sometimes caused by flash Owing to one second shutter release delay this mode is not recommended with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required Avoid moving camera while red eye reduction lamp is lit Red eye reduction with slow sync Combines red eye reduction with slow sync Use for portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery Available only in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake Slow sync Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to capture both subject and background at night or under dim light This mode is only available in programmed auto and aperture priority auto exposure modes Use of tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake 188 Flash mode Description 7 In shutter priority auto or manual exposure mode REAR flash fires just before the shutter closes Use to create Rear curtain sync effect of a stream of l
80. the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D10 are in use The MB D10 Battery Pack The MB D10 takes one EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline Ni MH lithium or nickel manganese batteries an EN EL3e is supplied with the camera EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries are available separately Higher frame rates are available with EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries pg 87 note however that in the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as battery level drops The shooting information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D10 as follows CAA Om DD dy A BKT MB D10 battery type display Battery type EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery 304 EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion battery AA batteries e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 320 s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 320 s in exposure mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 320 s Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 250 s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 250 s in exposure mode F or A auto F
81. the camera monitor are shown in bold modeling 115 315 monitor pre flash 184 193 range 307 427 ready indicator 103 185 193 sync speed 118 305 306 sync terminal 384 Flash cntrl for built in flash 309 Commander mode 311 Manual 310 Repeating flash 310 Flash shutter speed 308 Flash sync speed 305 Flexible program 117 Fn button 62 131 135 193 212 320 f number 119 120 371 Focal length 210 374 Focal length scale 37 Focal plane mark 82 Focus 71 72 74 76 78 81 autofocus 72 74 76 80 contrast detect 90 98 phase detection 90 electronic rangefinder 82 370 372 indicator 53 82 lock 78 mode 72 continuous servo AF 72 79 283 285 manual 72 81 94 single servo AF 72 78 284 point 74 76 97 264 285 289 contrast detect 97 tracking 73 286 287 3D 74 286 predictive 72 73 Focus point wrap around 288 Focus tracking with lock on 287 Focusing screen 429 Format 43 332 Format memory card 332 Front curtain sync 188 FV lock 192 FX format 36x24 59 G GPS 213 229 connecting 213 data 214 229 GPS 213 GPS data 229 H HDMI 257 435 HDMI 333 Help 26 31 HI 107 Hide image 263 High definition 257 333 435 High ISO NR 278 Highlights 222 264 Histogram 223 224 264 l Image area 58 69 Image area 58 61 Auto DX crop 58 61 Choose image area 59 61 FX format 36x24 59 Image authentication 342 Image comment 335 Image Dust Off 337 Image fil
82. the camera varies exposure compensation with each shot while in the case of flash bracketing pg 131 flash level is varied with each shot i TTL and in the case of optional SB 900 and SB 800 flash units auto aperture flash control modes only see pages 377 380 Only one photograph is produced each time the shutter is released meaning that several shots are required to complete the bracketing sequence Exposure and flash bracketing are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot In white balance bracketing pg 135 the camera creates multiple images each time the shutter is released each with a different white balance adjustment Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence White balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or experimenting with different white balance settings See Also At default settings the camera varies both exposure and flash level Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg 315 is used to choose the type of bracketing performed Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f6 Assign preview button pg 324 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 Note that some button press
83. the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see steps 2 and 3 of Renaming Shooting Menu Banks pg 270 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images TIF for TIFF RGB images JPG for JPEG images and NDF for dust off reference data Image Quality Choose image quality pg 64 Image Size Choose the size at which pictures are recorded pg 69 Image Area Although the D700 can record photographs with the same diagonal picture angle as a 35mm format camera using a3 2 aspect ratio it can also be used to record photographs with the smaller DX picture angle pg 58 JPEG Compression Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary file size for improved image quality pg 67 NEF RAW Recording Choose compression and bit depth options for NEF RAW images pg 67 White Balance Adjust white balance settings pg 140 Set Picture Control Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings pg 160 Manage Picture Control Save and modify custom Pictur
84. used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Modeling Flash If On the default setting is selected when the camera is being used with the built in flash or an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed pg 115 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected e5 Auto Bracketing Set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing pg 130 is in effect Choose AE amp flash AB the default setting to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only 4 to perform only flash level bracketing or WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing pg 135 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG 315 e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M This option determines which settings are affected when AE amp flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode Option Description hail Flash speed gt default Camera varies shutter speed Custom Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed and flash level Custom Setting e5 set to AE amp flash Flash speed Camera varies shutter speed and aperture Custom Setting e5 set to AE only or shutter speed
85. widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera e DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card e Exif version 2 21 The camera supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 21 a standard in which information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers e PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer e HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection the camera uses a type C mini pin connector 435 436 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D10 multi power battery pack are given below CIPA standard One EN EL3e battery camera Approximatel
86. x2 000 shots that will be taken is 7 er ww displayed to the right Number of Number Total intervals of shots number of interval shots 6 start shooting Ge Interval timer shooting a Start Highlight Start gt On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval timer highlight Start gt Off and press The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before each series of shots is taken If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of trust by is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing This prevents light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure when shooting with your eye away from the viewfinder 205 206 M Out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting pg 207 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure and or flash bracketing is active whi
87. 0 RG AE lock Hold E fa AF lock only 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging 3 Focus Position the subject in the _ center of the frame and press v the shutter release button oo halfway to focus 192 4 Lock flash level i After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Fn button Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon m will appear in the ila 25 55 viewfinder 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icon Em is no longer displayed in the viewfinder 193 m Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL the default option is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 309 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 900 and SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for det
88. 00111 200310 e 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 373 374 The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 24 mm 16 mm in DX format to 300mm Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Zoom position Min range z AF S DX 12 24mm f 4G ED 18 mm 0 6 m 2 ft lt AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED 20 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED 28 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D ED 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in AF 20 35mm f 2 8D 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in z PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5D ED 24 mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED 35 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3in AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED 24 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3in AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED 35mm 1 5 m 4 ft 11 in When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all ranges The built in flash can also be used with AI Al modified Nikkor Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 24 300mm Al 50 300mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 and Al S 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 180mm or above and Al 50 300mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 135mm or above m Red Eye Reduction Le
89. 1 52 Ready the Camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep you upper body stable Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation For information on framing photographs in the monitor see page 89 Focus and Shoot 1 Press the shutter release button halfway to focus pg 54 At default settings the y camera will focus on the a subject in the center Focus focus point Frame a indicator capacity photo in the viewfinder with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and press the shutter release button halfway If the camera is able to focus a beep will sound and the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder If the subject is dark the AF assist illuminator may light automatically to assist the focus operation Viewfinder display Description Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus on subject in focus blinks point using autofocus While the shutter release button is pressed halfway focus will lock and the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer f
90. 1 16 22 32 0 6 1 1 2ft 3 ft 7in 16 22 32 0 6 0 8 2ft 2ft 7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In programmed auto exposure mode mode F the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 1 8 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 427 428 Specifications BE Nikon D700 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective pixels Effective pixels 12 1 million Image sensor Image sensor 36 0 x 23 9 mm CMOS sensor Nikon FX format Total pixels 12 87 million Dust reduction system Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX 2 software required Storage Image size pixels e FX format 36 x 24 image area 4 256 x 2 832 L 3 184 x 2 120 M 2 128 x 1 416 S DX format 24 x 16 image area 2 784 x 1 848 L 2 080 x 1 384 M 1 392 x 920 S File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed compress
91. 124 Timer 102 203 Trim 356 Two button reset 196 U USB 238 245 cable 240 245 UTC 39 215 229 V Video 101 255 333 cable 255 mode 333 Video mode 333 Viewfinder 10 45 429 eyepiece 45 102 205 focus 45 81 Viewfinder grid display 298 ViewNX 64 161 182 243 Vignette control 276 Virtual horizon 99 322 346 Virtual horizon 346 w WB 135 140 White balance 135 140 bracketing 135 preset manual 141 148 White balance 140 Auto 140 Choose color temp 141 147 Cloudy 141 Direct sunlight 140 Flash 141 Fluorescent 140 Incandescent 140 Preset manual 141 148 Shade 141 Wireless 242 385 network 242 385 transmitter 242 385 Wireless transmitter 242 World time 39 334 Date and time 39 334 Date format 40 334 Daylight saving time 39 334 Time zone 39 334 WT 4 242 385 443 444 aN Nikon No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION NIKON CORPORATION C Fuji Bldg 2 3 Marunouchi 3 chome Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 8331 Japan Printed in Japan SB8G04 11 2008 Nikon Corporation 6MB0231 1 04
92. 13 Eyelet for camera strap 21 7 Accessory shoe 14 Focal plane mark 6 82 for optional flash unit 384 15 Control panel sscsssssssesceeeeeee 8 Camera Body Continued Bir 9 ai 10 glen OC IN BOP 16 1 Built in flash we eceesseesseeeee 185 8 Connector cover 240 255 2 Flash pop up button 185 9 HDMI mini pin connector 257 3 4 flash mode button 185 10 Video Connector 255 flash compensation 11 USB CONNECHOF csccssseeee 240 245 button sssssssssrsssssssrrssssssrreesssserseese 190 12 DC IN connector for 4 Flash sync terminal optional AC adapter EH 5a COVEN iania nna 384 OME m Ee EPEA ES 385 5 Ten pin remote terminal 13 Lens release button uu 37 COVEN msnnen 213 389 14 Focus mode selector 72 81 6 Flash sync terminial 384 15 Meter coupling lever 430 7 Ten pin remote 16 Mirror eesssssssssssssssssssssee 89 104 395 terminal wees 213 389 1 AF assist illuminator 290 Self timer lamp eeescseseceeeeeeee 103 Red eye reduction lamp 188 2 Sub command diial 00 16 3 Depth of field preview DUTTON sinisini 115 324 4 Fn button 131 135 193 320 5 Battery chamber covet 34 7 Contact cover for optional MB D10 battery pack 385 8 CPU contacts 9 Mounting index 10 LENS MOUNT eeesee
93. 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in 1 Choose a start option PECET Highlight one of the following options and press To exit without acquiring image dust off data press MENU Ea Clean sensor and then start e Start The message shown at right will PEETI be displayed and rEF will appear in i i Take phi b the viewfinder and control panel f tro d IS p lays Focus willbe set to infinity e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will EF appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is complete ra vV Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 337 338 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button hal
94. 272 1 Display only if Focus point is selected for Display mode pg 264 2 Elis displayed if FX format 36 x 24 was selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu If DX format 24 x 16 was selected will be displayed in yellow Ca 221 BE Highlights 1 Protect StatUS csecsecseesessees 235 4 Folder number 2 Retouch indicator 349 frame number sssssssssssrsssrsssrsss 272 3 Image highlights 2 264 5 Current channel 6 Highlight display indicator 264 1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode pg 264 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for current channel Press lt or gt while pressing 9 button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R G B gt all channels red green blue 3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected a for the Image area option in the shooting menu 222 BE RGB Histogram 1 Protect status uo cecesecsseseeseeeees 235 5 Histogram RGB channel In all 2 Retouch indicator wees 349 histograms horizontal axis gives 3 Image highlights 2 pixel brightness vertical axis 4 Folder number number of pixels frame number s sssssssss19s10110 1 272 6 Current channel 7 Histogram red channel 4 8 Histogram green channel 4 9 Histogram blue channel 4 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode pg 264 2 Blinking areas indicate highli
95. BE nterrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting Pumm menu while a multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken highlight Cancel and press If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e A two button reset is performed pg 196 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted Interval Timer Photography The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals 1 Select Interval timer c AdiveDlishting OFF shooting 7 Vignette control ON Long exp NR OFF Highlight Interval timer Sanne a shooting in the shooting 7 Wath wos Ak i menu pg 268 and press P Lal interval timer shooting ld 2 Selecta starting trigger E Interval timer shooting e Choose start time Highlight one of the following Gastar time i gt Choose start time options and press gt e Now Shooting begins about 3 s after settings are completed proceed to Step 4 e Start time Choose a start time see Step 3 M Before Shooting Choose single frame S continuous low speed CL
96. CPU lenses b6 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of 1 6 EV 1 Select Custom Setting b6 E b6Fine tune optimal exposure Highlight Custom Setting b6 D Rice Fine tune optimal exposure vai tlhe aka and press gt Yes c C 2 Select Yes The message shown at right will be displayed highlight Yes and press to proceed or select No to exit without altering exposure iy dG Fine tune optimal exposure F Exposure compensation icon Y isnot displayed when exposure is altered from the default value Continue L2 No 3 Selecta metering method Highlight Matrix metering Center weighted or Spot metering and press P E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Y ox Center weighted Spot metering 4 Choose an exposure value Press A or W to choose an exposure value from 1 to 1 EV Press to save changes and exit m Fine Tuning Exposure E b6 Fine tune optimal exposure Matrix metering Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and is not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation 4 icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation pg 128 is preferred in most s
97. Choose exposure mode P Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to select exposure mode F The camera will automatically adjust shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations MODE button Main command dial 3 Choose single frame release mode Hold the release mode dial lock release down and turn the release mode dial to single frame At this setting the camera will take one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial 4 Choose single point AF Rotate the AF area mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to single point AF At this setting the user can choose the focus point AF area mode selector 5 Choose single servo autofocus Rotate the focus mode selector until it clicks into place pointing to S single servo autofocus At this setting the camera will automatically focus on the subject in the selected Focus mode selector focus point when the shutter release button is pressed halfway Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in focus 6 Choose matrix metering Rotate the metering selector to K3 matrix metering Matrix metering uses information from the 1 005 segment RGB sensor to ensure optimal results for the entire frame Metering selector 5
98. Delete files or insert 41 262 new folder new memory card 413 414 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page ap not F Memory cardhas Format memory card Format the blinks not been formatted or insert new 41 43 for use in camera memory card card Select folder Folder No images on containing images A memory card orin from Playback folder contains no 41 263 imate folder s selected menu or insert ges for playback different memory card No images can be played back until All photos in another folder has All images are P been selected or current folder are Seas 263 hidden hidden Hide image used to f allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or modified File does not contain image data using a computer or different make of camera or file is corrupt File can not be played back on camera Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Memory card does Images created with Cannot select not contain images 3 other devices cannot 350 this file that can be be retouched retouched Check printer To Check printer Printer error ent sele ct 244 Continue if available Paper in printer is Insert paper of Check paper p P _ correctsizeandselect 244 not of selected size Continue Paper jam _ Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select 344 printer Contin
99. EG format 353 D Lighting D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs Before Press A or W to choose the amount of DAishting correction performed The effect can be va Pyp previewed in the edit display Press to a copy the photograph 354 Red Eye Correction This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding arel zoom Save To Use Description Press amp button to Q zoom in 9 button to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image Zoom out QE not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border Press to cancel zoom p we oh N Zoomin View other areas of image Cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be
100. ISO sensitivity auto control in shooting menu the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded Custom Setting e6 Auto bracketing mode M pg 316 can be used to change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed and or aperture or by varying flash level alone EE White Balance Bracketing 1 Select white balance bracketing G5 Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom AE fash Setting e5 Auto bracketing set pg aS 315 is WE WB bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the Fn button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence The number of shots is shown in the control panel LF LJ Number of shot Fn button Main command Control panel dial WB bracketing indicator At settings other than zero a m icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel 135 136 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the Fn button rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance adjustment Each increment is roughly equivalent to 5 mired re Fn button Sub command Control panel dial White balance increment Choose from increments of 1 5 mired 2 10 mired or 3 15 mir
101. If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored 2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 269 Settings in all other banks are unaffected EE Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu pg 271 Option Default File naming pg 274 DSC Image quality pg 64 JPEG normal Image size pg 69 Large Image area pg 58 Auto DX crop pg 58 On Choose image area pg 59 FX format 36 X 24 JPEG compression pg 67 Size priority NEF RAW recording pg 67 Type pg 67 Lossless compressed NEF RAW bit depth pg 68 12 bit White balance pg 140 Auto Fine tuning pg 143 Off Choose color temp pg 147 5000K Set Picture Control pg 160 Standard Color space pg 181 sRGB Active D lighting pg 180 Off Vignette control pg 276 Normal Long exp NR pg 277 Off High ISO NR pg 278 Normal ISO sensitivity settings pg 106 ISO sensitivity pg 106 200 ISO sensitivity auto control pg 108 Off Live view Live view mode pg 90 Hand held Release mode pg 91 Single frame Multiple exposure pg 198 Reset Interval timer shooting pg 203 Reset 1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be re
102. Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Photos are blotched or e Clean lens smeared e Clean low pass filter 392 e Adjust white balance to match 140 Col ural light source aaa e Adjust Set Picture Control 160 settings 405 406 Problem Solution Page Can not measure white ae Subject is too dark or too bright 151 balance Image can not be selected as source for preset white Image was not created with D700 154 balance e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image 64 uality option selected for image White balance bracketing ain P g unavailable N e Multiple exposure mode is in 202 effect A auto is selected for sharpening Effects of Picture Control contrast or saturation For differ from image to consistent results over a series of 166 image photographs choose a setting other than A auto Metering can not be e Autoexposure lock is in effect 126 changed e Camera is in live view mode 100 Exposure compensation oceans P IOn Choose exposure mode F 5 or A 128 can not be used Reddish areas appearin Reddish areas and uneven textures photos may appear in long time exposures Turn long exposure 277 Textures are uneven noise reduction on when shooting at shutter speeds of tisk i Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in Lower built in flash 187 continuous shooting mo
103. MOMOCHIOME si eiciessnsecssssesassecosnssbscastsascssotuvalcateedeandesstuasssgpoeniste 357 Filter Effects 358 Color Balance Image Overlay uu 359 Side by Side COMPALISON ssssecsssescecsseccessseccsseeceeneeeenees 362 i My Menu Creating a Custom M NU cseesssssesscesseseceseececsees 364 Displaying Recent Settings xvi Technical Notes 369 Compatible Lenses ceesssscsssecsseecsssccsscesssecsseecsscceesecesueeesneecsneeesess 370 Optional Flash Units Speedlights ssssssscsseccsseccsseecseeesees 377 Other ACCESSOVICS sessesssssssssessssssessessesssessessssssceseesesaneeseeaseaeesseesees 385 Caring for the Camera cssscssssccssssecsssssccseesecssseecessescesnseecnneeecesees 391 St ra Geniai aaia 391 Cleani NG seisseen ines ae 391 The LOW Pass Filter eescsisinineimennasinunnresiiaas 392 Clean NOW saiscocssicscaiscvasecsseansczosseqsoneecgnattcchaasscnnasecioasescinsensieatis 392 Clean at Startup Shutdown sssssssssssssssressssesssseesssreesseesssse 393 Manual Cleaning sssssccsssscsssesscsssscsssseccssecsssssessssseesenseceeneees 395 Caring for the Camera and Battery CautionS sssssssessssss 398 Troublesho ting eesssnsssccsssesecssesecesescecussescessescesseeecsneescesseescuneeseesees 402 Error Message Seines ncn cosststecevze esasstesevcvsest senesnes aena aiaa 409 APPENA IX onssa E Specifications o E EEE EEE ENET ANTE xvii For Your Safet
104. N eea and press P Bieter 2 Select a Picture Control Be Set Picture Control O ED Standard Highlight the desired Picture _ Control and press pppoe GEcrid GaAdiust The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected To select a different Picture Control press A or F then press gt to display Picture Control options and press The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the shooting information display when the MA button is pressed Picture Controls can also be selected in the shooting information display pg 15 GaAdiust GHOK EEA soll mit she mas A ODF 350 a A BKT Picture Control indicator 163 164 Modifying Existing Picture Controls Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls Vivid can be modified to suit the scene or the 1 Sharpening user s creative intent Choose a balanced Contrast combination of settings using Quick adjust AEs or make manual adjustments to individual settings 1 Select a Picture Control ESNL Neutral Highlight the desired Picture S Control in the Set Picture aiiora Control menu pg 162 and press gt g 2 GEGrid Gadiust 2 Adjust settings Via a Press A or W to highlight the i amenna desired setting
105. Nikon DIGITAL CAMERA D700 User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from K The Q amp A Index pp iv ix Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Table of Contents pp x xvii Find items by function or menu name The Quick Start Guide pp 22 23 A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away The Index pp 438 443 Search by key word Error Messages pp 409 416 If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor find the solution here Troubleshooting pp 402 408 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safety Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety pg xviii Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera Memory cards are sold separately e D700 digital e Body cap e BM 9 LCD monitor camera pg 3 pp 36 388 cover pg 21 e EN EL3e e MH 18a quick e AN D700 strap rechargeable charger with pg 21 Li ion battery with power cable terminal cover pg 32 pp 32 34 e EG D100 video e UC E4 USB cable BS 1 accessory shoe cable pg 255 pp 238 245 cover pg 377 amp gt
106. NxX supplied and other compatible software or software created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera e Manage custom Picture Controls pg 175 Rename or delete custom Picture Controls Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture Controls In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon websites Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Nikon Picture Controls Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls can be shared among compatible devices and software 161 162 Selecting Nikon Picture Controls The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene Option Description ESD Standard Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations ENL Neutral Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched EVI Vivid Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors EHC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs BE Choosing a Picture Control 1 Select Set Picture Control n SHOOTING MENU E NEF RAW recording In the shooting menu pg 268 5 highlight Set Picture Control A
107. P high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250 s default Flash sync speed set to 1 250 s 1 200 s Flash sync speed set to 1 200 s 1 160 s Flash sync speed set to 1 160 s 1 125s Flash sync speed set to 1 125 s 1 100 s Flash sync speed set to 1 100 s 1 80 s Flash sync speed set to 1 80 s 1 60 s Flash sync speed set to 1 60 s Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter priority auto or manual exposure modes select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field FP is displayed in the shooting information display when auto FP high speed sync is active 305 Flash Control at 1 320 s Auto FP When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 305 the built in flash and optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 320 s at faster speeds Auto FP High Speed Sync is available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB R200 flash
108. Printing 243 Programmed auto 116 Protecting photographs 235 R Rear curtain sync 189 Recent settings 368 Red eye correction 355 Red eye reduction 188 Release button to use dial 328 Release mode 83 91 continuous 84 86 91 high speed 84 86 442 low speed 84 86 91 299 dial 85 lock release 85 live view 89 mirror up 104 self timer 102 single frame 84 Remote cord 101 104 389 Reset 196 271 282 418 Reset custom settings 282 Reset shooting menu 271 Reverse indicators 330 RGB 64 181 222 223 RGB Histogram 223 264 Rotate tall 265 s S small 69 Save load settings 344 Saving camera settings 344 Self timer delay 297 Sensitivity 105 106 108 Set Picture Control 162 Monochrome 162 Filter effects 165 167 Toning 165 167 Neutral 162 Standard 162 Vivid 162 Setup menu 331 Shooting data 225 226 227 228 Shooting info display 12 301 Shooting info display 301 Shooting menu 268 Shooting menu bank 269 Shutter spd amp aperture lock 326 Shutter priority auto 118 Shutter release button 53 54 78 126 296 half press 53 54 78 126 Shutter release button AE L 296 Side by side comparison 362 Single point AF 74 75 Single servo AF 72 78 284 Size 69 Slide show 266 Slide show 266 Frame interval 266 Slow sync 188 Speedlight 377 Spot 112 295 T Television 255 333 Ten pin remote terminal 213 389 Thumbnail 232 TIFF RGB 64 Time 39 334 Time exposure
109. S lt ccc cccccestssccescescecessssssccesccscecescaccavsoccesress pg 210 Using a GPS UNIT eee eeaeee searre eera resore Eoen pg 213 195 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the QUAL and buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off button QUAL button briefly while settings are reset Option Default Option Default Focus point Center Bracketing Off 2 Exposure mode Programmed Flash mode Front curtain auto sync Flexible program off Flash off Exposure off compensation compensation FV lock off AE hold Off Multiple exposure Off 1 Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 is unaffected 196 al 2 Number of shots is reset to zero Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV exposure flash bracketing or 1 white balance bracketing The following shooting menu options will also be reset Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset pg 269 Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected Option Default Option Default Image quality JPEG Normal White balance Auto Image size Large ISO sensitivity 200 Fine tuning off If the current Picture Control has been modified existing settings for the Picture Control will also be restored See A
110. S see page 377 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 315 for more information See Also See page 108 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control For information on using the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu for reducing noise at slow shutter speeds see page 277 For information on choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and aperture see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 292 For information on changing the roles of the main and sub command dials see Custom Setting f9 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 326 115 F Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Select exposure mode F MODE button Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until F is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Main command dial PREG Shutter speed 1 400 s Aperture f 10 116 Flexible Program In exposure mode P different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are active flexi
111. SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination With other Speedlights the camera AF assist illuminator is used for AF assist illumination and red eye reduction When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 17 135 mm the SB 900 provides active AF assist illumination for all focus points note however that autofocus is available only with the following focus points 888 550883 09990008820 2 17 19 mm Besceccss5 20 105 mm sssscccesss 106 135MM o0o00o0500000 200999899 88 38 5 888988 888 8883298555 8 When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24 105 mm the SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 provides active AF assist illumination to assist autofocus for the following focus points 24 34mm 35 49mm_ gt o 50 105mm oo 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 is is In programmed auto the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to sensitivity ISO equivalency as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 5 5 6 7 1 8 10 11 For each one step increase in sensitivity e g from 200 to 400 aperture is stopped down by half an f stop If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash
112. ack into place while either button is pressed temporarily interrupting live view Live view is restored when the button is released The focus point can be selected using the multi selector Manual focus focus mode M pg 81 Focus using the lens focusing ring The focus point for electronic range finding can be selected using the multi selector 94 5 Take the picture 4 Press the shutter release button the rest E of the way down to reset focus and exposure and take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting 1 No Picture After shooting play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the photograph has been recorded Note that the sound the mirror makes when the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter and that pressing the shutter release button all the way down when the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF will end live view without a photograph being recorded g 95 p 96 Tripod Mode 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface 2 Select live view mode Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the re
113. age area Choose an option and press The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 59 61 HE The Fn Button 1 Assign image area to the Fn button EEE lt FUNC button dials Select Choose image area for Custom 5 on SHE SIEA Setting f5 Assign FUNC button gt 1 step spd aperture a kea PU Choose nor CPU lens number i EKI Auto bracketing FUNC button dials pg 323 ap 2 None E lt gt 62 Choose the image area Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder pg 59 This operation can not be Fn button Main command performed while a multiple dial exposure is being recorded pg 201 The option currently selected for image area can be viewed by pressing 36 g the Fn button to display the image area in the viewfinder control panel or shooting information display FX format is displayed as 36 24 DX format as 24 16 M Auto DX Crop The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on The Fn Depth of Field Preview and AE L AF L Buttons Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button the default setting see Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 the depth of field preview button Custom setting f6 Assign preview button pg 324 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L
114. age will appear as Image 1 Set gain i Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or W to select the gain for image 1 Saath from values between 0 1 and Ozom Wselect 2 0 The default value is 1 0 selecting 0 5 cuts gain in half while selecting 2 0 doubles gain The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column Select the second Ba imase overlay ph otog raph r Image 1 Image2 Preview Press lt or gt to highlight ar Image 2 Repeat Steps 2 5 to 7 ESS select the second photo and E eat adjust gain Highlight the Preview BB Image overlay colu mn i Image1 Image 2 Press lt or gt to highlight the si io fae Preview column 2 Zoom 8 Preview the overlay E Imac overlay lt Overlay Press A or W to highlight Overlay and press to save the overlay without displaying a preview highlight Save and press To return to Step 7 and select new photos or adjust gain press 9 9 savethe overlay Press while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the S resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor m Image Overlay Only NEF RAW photographs created with the D700 can be selected for image overlay Other images are not displayed in the selection screen Only NEF RAW photographs with the same bit depth can be combined The overlay has the same photo info
115. ails While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 309 FV lock can be used with remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 900 and SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional speedlight are as follows Speedlight Flash mode Metered area i TTL 5 mm circle in center of frame Stand alone flash unit KA Area metered by flash exposure meter Used with other flash i TTL Entire frame units Advanced AA Area metered by flash exposure Wireless Lighting A master flash meter See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f6 Assign preview button pg 324 or Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 194 Other Shooting Options This chapter covers restoring default settings making multiple exposures interval timer photography and using GPS units and non CPU lenses Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings pg 196 Multiple EXPOSUrE eeaeee estreti terete teette Et EEE eetet ekat pg 198 Interval Timer Photography ssessosssscscsscscsscsssseseosee pg 203 NON CRU LENSE
116. ailure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock ZA Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations Z CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment Z Observe caution when using the flash e Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns e Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual impairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject A Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes or mouth Notices e No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without Nikon s prior written permission e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Notices
117. ain command dial Lens number Using a GPS Unit Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2 01 or 3 01 of the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format can be connected to the camera s ten pin remote terminal using an MC 35 GPS adapter cord available separately pg 389 allowing information on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector These devices connect to the MC 35 using a cable with a D sub 9 pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device See the MC 35 instruction manual for details Before turning the camera on set the GPS device to NMEA mode 4800 baud 213 214 When the camera establishes communication with a GPS device a icon will be displayed in the control panel Photo information for pictures taken while the amp icon is displayed will include an additional page pg 229 recording the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading If no data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds the icon will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS information GPS Data GPS data are only recorded when the icon is displayed Confirm that the i icon is displayed in the control panel before shooting A flashing amp icon indicates that t
118. and press lt or 4 gt ie Saturation gt to choose a value pg 165 Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted or select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the t button 3 Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from Set Picture Control default settings are indicated by an asterisk sawn in the Set Picture Control menu 2 G Grid GaAdiust EH Picture Control Settings Option Description Quick adjust Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral Monochrome or custom Picture Controls Sharpening Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 0 no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening Contrast s101 u0 a4N gt I IlL s uawysn pe jenuey Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes a
119. aphy Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com Introduction This chapter covers information you will need to know before using the camera including the names of camera parts OVENVICWeooccscssceccesscusscsesstcatectesccsresscestecsesczecectsecesccstccesenets pg 2 Getting to Know the Camera essesssscscsecscsscssososcoscososeos pg 3 Camera BOY aean a EAT A A AEA pg 3 The GontroliPamelfeee ccascccseseccrcecose nesses seers pg 8 The Viewfinder Display ssccsssccsssccnssscssscsseccsseceseecsnecesseeessees pg 10 The Shooting Information Display sscccsssecssccssecesseccnsecenee pg 12 Mle Command Dials aaaea n A AAA pg 16 QUICK Start G Uidel seeeseseeeeerterssee retete ereere tennie reenen se pg 22 Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly to get the most from the camera and keep them where they will be read by all those who use the product M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera
120. ards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card e Do not expose to water heat high levels of humidity or direct sunlight No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the control panel and viewfinder will show E If the camera is turned off with a charged EN EL3e battery and no memory card inserted will be displayed in the control panel See Also See page 332 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before shooting 1 Liftthe diopter adjustment control Remove the lens cap turn the camera on and pull the diopter adjustment control out 2 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter control until the viewfinder display focus points and AF area brackets are in sharp focus 3 Replace the diopter adjustment cont
121. ash M oak saana ga c3 Screen tips F 44 CI mode shooting speed a5 Max continuous release a6 File number sequence BD Reset custom settings al Shooting info display E 48 LOD illumination flash E 2 Flash shutter peed 180 Flash contri for built in flash TLS Modeling flash ON Auto bracketing sat w Auto bracketing Mode M R Reset custom Bracketing order 3 E ri switch a Custom setting bank settings pg 282 i Rivet pg 282 t Multi selector center butt gy 13 Multi selector y 14 Photo info playback 5 Assign FUNC button 16 Assign preview button r1 Assign AELIAFL button E 18 Shutter spd amp aperture lock The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting Page Custom Setting Page Custom setting bank 282 d Shooting display Reset custom settings 282 d5 Max continuous release 299 a Autofocus d6 File number sequence 300 al AF C priority selection 283 d7 Shooting info display 301 a2 AF S priority selection 284 48 LCD illumination 302 a3 Dynamic AF area 285 d9 Exposure delay mode 302 a4 Focus tracking with lock on 287 410 MB D10 battery type 302 a5 AF activation 287 d Battery order 304 a6 AF point illumination 288 e Bracketing flash a7 Focus point wrap around 288 el Flash s
122. atteries EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries available separately or EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion batteries are recommended for best performance Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries pg 436 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline and nickel manganese batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Control panel Viewfinder Description um Batteries fully charged Ca cA Low battery Ready fresh batteries ta ca g x blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Change batteries Battery level for EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 rechargeable Li ion batteries is displayed normally 303 d11 Battery Order Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the battery pack are used first when an optional MB D10 battery pack is attached Option Description WD Use MB D10 batteries The camera battery is used only when the first default batteries in the MB D10 are exhausted D700 Use camera battery The batteries in the MB D10 are used only first when the camera battery is exhausted A B icon is displayed in
123. ause damage not covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and Lens lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can mirror and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove viewfinder fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this Y could result in damage or malfunction Monitor Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals 391 392 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off BE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Display the Clean image 7 SETUP MENU Format memory card sensor menu LOD brightness r 7 a r ani Highlight Clean image sensor a eh in the setup menu and press P ace El Langua
124. ber of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly 424 d5 Max Continuous Release pg 299 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 425 Exposure Program The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph ISO 200 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF 50mm f 1 4 D amp x 2 UND YY SY OONA TH KOK YM Q fi 1 4 f 2 2 8 l4 5 6 8 11 16 22 32 1 4 f 16 Aperture VRAD BP 6 30 15 8 4 2 1 2 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 5001000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 17 1 3 EV are reduced to 171 3 EV 426 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range The range of the built in flash varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 m ft 1 4 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 1 0 8 5 3ft 3in 27ft 11in 2 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 0 7 6 1 2ft 4in 20ft 2 8 4 5 6 8 11 16 0 6 4 2 2ft 13 ft 9in 4 5 6 8 11 16 22 0 6 3 0 2ft 9ft 10in 5 6 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 2 1 2ft 6ft 11in 8 11 16 22 32 0 6 1 5 2ft 4ft 11in 1
125. ble program Rotate the command dial to the right for large apertures small f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Main command dial Rotate the command dial to the left for small apertures large f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect an asterisk appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the command dial until the asterisk is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off Shutter speed 4 000 s Shutter speed 1 80 s Aperture f 2 8 Aperture f 22 See Also See page 426 for information on the built in exposure program 117 5 Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode amp V A Press the MODE button and I rotate the main command dial until Sis displayed in Main command dial mt the viewfinder and control panel 2 Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are active rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to x 25 orto values betwee
126. bracketing sequence is zero GF and is no longer displayed in the control panel The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 196 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display pg 143 No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis In self timer mode pg 102 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded White Balance Keeping Colors True The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade direct sunlight or under incandescent lighting Unlike the film used in film cameras digital cameras can mimic this adjustme
127. by the government and of prints maps drawings movies and certified documents stipulated by law photographs is governed by national is prohibited and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including battery chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and pro
128. c Mode Display 4 does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the 5 button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The icon flashes when the built in flash is in mode M 1 Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from the built in flash particular care is required when not using a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be
129. ce image Highlight the source image To view the highlighted image full frame press the amp button 5 Copy white balance Press the center of the multi selector to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment pg 335 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance E White balance preset d 0 d 4 and press gt to select another C Preset manual preset tb Change Set Edit comment Select image Copy H0 155 156 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual E White balance Incandescent Highlight Preset manual in the Pet Sala white balance menu pg 140 Ap H f Shade and press gt s fa Choose color temp El PRE 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press the center of the multi selector To select the highlighted preset and display fine tuning menu pg 144 without completing the next step press instead of pressing the center of the multi selector 3 Select Set E White balance E Preset manual Highlight Set and press P Fine tuning menu for the Edit comment selected white balance preset Select image is displayed pg 144 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE P
130. cent 6 500 Use under daylight fluorescent lights Use under high color temperature High temp mercury ge IR vanes 7 200 light sources e g mercury vapor P lamps 3 Direct sunlight 5 200 Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight Color temp Option K Description 4 Flash 5 400 Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 Use in daylight under overcast skies fs Shade 8 000 Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list 10 000 of values pg 147 Use subject light source or existing PRE Preset manual photograph as reference for white balance pg 148 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources If the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance I Choose color temp White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel ZI Control panel WB button Main command dial The White Balance Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in the shooting menu pg 268 Fluorescent Selecting 3 fluorescent with the WB button and main command dial selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white balance menu
131. contrast detect autofocus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red Manual focus focus mode M pg 81 Use zoom for precise focus 97 p 98 6 Takethe picture 4 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way Ba down to take the picture If continuous high speed or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode the monitor will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the same as that selected for standard shooting 1 Contrast Detect Autofocus The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the AF ON button is pressed in continuous servo autofocus mode In both single servo and continuous servo autofocus modes the shutter can be released even when the camera is not in focus vV Focusing with Contrast Detect Autofocus Contrast detect autofocus will take longer than normal phase detection autofocus In the following situations the camera may be unable to focus using contrast detect autofocus e The camera is not mounted on a tripod e The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame e The subject lacks contrast e The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness e Across star filter or
132. count Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 1 ISO Sensitivity i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 6400 At values over 6400 or under 200 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings Using the Built in Flash Follow these steps when using the built in flash 1 Choosea metering method Metering selector pg 112 Select matrix or center weighted metering to activate i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected 2 Press the flash pop up button The built in flash will pop up and begin charging When the flash is fully charged the flash ready indicator 4 will light SA PU Flash pop up button i25 55 so 29054 3 Choose a flash mode Press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired flash mode icon is displayed in the control panel J pg 188 4 button Main command dial Control panel 185 4 Check exposure shutter speed and aperture Press the shutter release button halfway and check shutter speed and aperture The settings available when the built in flash is raised are listed below
133. created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye Create copy 355 Trim Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table To Use Description Reduce size of crop te Press the button to reduce the size of the crop Increase size of Q Press the amp button to increase the size crop of the crop Changecropaspect Rotate the main command dial to ratio L j switch between aspect ratios of 3 2 rR 4 3 and5 4 Use multi selector to move the crop to Move cro 3 P another area of the image Press center of multi selector to Preview crop preview cropped image Create copy Save the current crop as a separate file 356 M Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG or TIFF RGB photos have an image quality pg 64 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Aspect ratio Possible sizes 3 2 3 424 x 2 280 2 560 x 1 704 1 920 x 1 280 1 280 x 856 960 x 640 640 x 424 ea 3 424 x 2 568 2 560 x 1 920 1 920 x 1 440 1 280 x 960 960 x 720 640 x 480 a 3 216 x 2 568 2 400 x 1 920 1 808 x
134. cseeeseeseeesees 11 Tripod socket 12 Body CaP esssesosssssssvssssosesoroesssoeess 388 Camera Body Continued 1 Viewfinder on eecssesecsessssecsseeessees 45 2 Viewfinder eyepiece 45 3 Eyepiece shutter lever 45 4 Tt delete button 56 236 nm format button ccecceeeeee 43 5 gt playback button 55 218 6 MONItOF eee 55 89 218 7 MENU menu button 26 259 8 Om protect button 235 2 help button un eecseeceseeeeeeees 31 9 QE thumbnail playback ZOOM out button cesseesseeseeees 232 10 amp playback zoom in DUTTON oeesceesseessecstesseessesssessseesees 234 11 OK button we ecssesssseesseeseees 30 1 Diopter adjustment control 45 2 Metering Selector 113 3 Art AE AF lock button wo eceeccsesssesseesseesses 78 79 325 4 AF ON AF ON button 73 96 5 Main command dial 00 16 6 Multi Sele COL eesseecsssessseeeseees 28 7 Center of multi selector 28 8 Focus selector lock eessessseee 76 9 Memory card slot covert Al 10 AF area mode selector 74 11 Memory card access DANI niinniin iin 42 54 12 M information display quick settings display button 12 The Control Panel 14 12 11 10 9 8 1 Shu
135. ct in selected focus point only Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point If type G or D lens is used pg 370 camera can distinguish human i subjects from background for Auto area AF improved subject detection In single servo AF active focus points are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses Active focus points are not displayed in continuous servo AF AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the shooting information display when the EM button is pressed AF area mode indicator Information display _ Single point AF eseer recess psseemceess 7 Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 285 9 points scsseaaeeee default oe eee Dynamic 2N points i AR z i area AF 51 points Perrey preees z T F as 51 points 3D tracking jii AF area mode Auto area AF g Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on the settings available in dynamic area AF see Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area pg 285 For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 287 75 ES 76 Focus Poin
136. ctsscrseccacessscccctstesteccenceeacers pg 86 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View pg 89 Self Timer Modene e ee AA E aots pg 102 Mirror Up MOG iiircssccececcccesecsecscssvesecsscsucensesssessers cess ceers pg 104 83 Choosing a Release Mode The camera supports the following release modes Mode Description S Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release Single frame button is pressed CL While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous 1 5 frames per second Frame rate can be chosen using low speed Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 299 ch While shutter release button is held down camera records Continuous high speed 84 up to 5 frames per second 2 Frame pictures in monitor pg 89 Recommended at high or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is Live view hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in obtaining very precise focus Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused Self timer by camera shake pg 102 Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto Mup or close up photography or in other situations in which the Mirror up slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs pg 104 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining setti
137. d aperture Manual P F M og 121 Set shutter speed to tus tb for long time p9 exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring pg 370 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses pg 372 can only be used in exposure mode A aperture priority auto and M manual In other modes exposure mode f is automatically selected when a non CPU lens is attached The exposure mode indicator F or S in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder See Also See page 326 for information on locking shutter speed modes amp and M and aperture modes f and To choose the exposure mode press the MODE MODE button button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold Preview button the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the camera modes F and 5 or the value chosen by the user modes f and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 and other optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CL
138. d by the outermost focus No wrap R f default points so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect 288 a8 AF Point Selection Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description Choose from the 51 focus points shown at right AF51 51 points 2 EETA default 90009009000 200000000 AF11 11 points Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for quick focus point selection 289 290 a9 Built in AF Assist Illuminator Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor Option Description On default The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met 1 Single servo autofocus is selected for focus mode pg 72 2 Auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode pg 74 or single point or dynamic area AF is chosen and the center focus point is selected Off The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length
139. d return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be z Border displayed Press A or to choose print style from Printer default default for current Print with border printer Print with border print No border photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu shown at right will be a Time stamp displayed Press A or W to choose Printer default default Time for current printer Print time Print time stamp stamp stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu Printer default Border Printer default No time stamp 247 Option Description Menu shown at right will be PT displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press To crop picture highlight Crop and press gt If Crop is selected dialog shown pamm at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop SE to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press No cropping Cropping 248 4 start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press Wance m Selecting Photographs for Printing Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW or TIFF RGB pg 64 can not be selected for printing See Also See page 415 for information on what to do if a
140. d used in the video device Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device Television Playback Use of an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately is recommended for extended playback When the EH 5a or EH 5 is connected the camera monitor off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically Note that the edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback pg 266 High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini pin HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to high definition device Tune the device to the HDMI channel Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition television or monitor screen the camera monitor d na will remain off HDMI pg 333 At the default setting of Auto the camera automatically selects the appropriate HDMI format for the high definition device The HDMI format can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu pg 333 257 258 Menu Guide This chapter describe
141. d value List can be used with only one lens of each type highlight the saved desired lens and press P values The menu shown at right will be AF fine tune displayed press A or W to choose an is Seeniea nak identifier and press to save changes y 3556 VR 7 Wo 1 a and exit g No l lt Oset GHOK 347 M AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied M Live View Tripod Mode Tuning is not applied to contrast detect autofocus when Tripod is selected in live view mode pg 96 Saved Value Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter Firmware Version View the current camera firmware version 348 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera To display the retouch menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the retouch menu tab for more information see page 26 Option See page ER D lighting 354 Red eye correction 355 Trim 356 Monochrome 357 Q Filter effects 358 amp amp 2 Color balance 358 sh Imag
142. d when On is selected for Custom Setting d2 not displayed when DX format 24 x 16 is selected for Image area pg 58 298 AF area brackets wu 45 94 12 mm reference circle for center weighted metering 112 FOCUS POINTS eeseeceeceeeeees 76 289 FOCUS INICATOF Ru 53 82 Metering esssecseecsseseseseeseesseenee 112 Autoexposure AE lock 126 Shutter speed lock icon 326 Shutter speed Aperture lock icon Aperture f number 119 121 Aperture number of StopS 000 120 373 Exposure MOCE Q cescsssssssecssteeses 114 Flash compensation IAGICATON ieseana 190 Exposure compensation INdicator oe essseeescsssecccsseceesseceessees 128 ISO sensitivity eee eessseeeeeeeene 106 No Battery 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Number of exposures TEMAINING sessseesseessecscerssensecsseees 47 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 53 87 White balance recording TCI CATON eesccsssessscenseeseccnsseesenees 151 Exposure compensation VAIUE pisvicessscntsasecscconaascesinnnssencesaasee 128 Flash compensation value 190 Flash ready indicatov 185 FV lock indicator 0 ssesseeeeeeee 193 Flash sync indicator sss 305 Aperture stop indicator 120 Electronic analog exposure displayen 123 Exposure compensation display 128 Tilt indicator e222 Battery indicator 46 Auto ISO sensitivity TCI CATON
143. de BE Playback Problem Solution Page Flashing areas appear in images shootingdatasooEar Press A or W to choose photo Snia 2 PP information displayed or change 220 264 g settings for Display mode A graph appears during playback NEF RAW imageis Photo was taken at image quality of NEF 66 not played back JPEG Some photos are not displayed during Select All for Playback folder 263 playback Ee e Select On for Rotate tall 265 Tall P e Photo was taken with Off selected for 336 a Si Auto image rotation e dante tea e Photo is displayed in image review 219 orientation e Camera was pointed up or down 336 when photo was taken Can not delete photo Photo is protected remove protection 235 Message is displayed a vali Select All for Playback folder 263 for playback Can not change print order Memory card is full delete photos 47 Cam not el tohoto Photo is in NEF RAW format Transfer for brintin P to computer and print using supplied 243 p 9 software or Capture NX 2 Hira TV Choose correct video mode 333 Photo is not displayed t on high definition Confirm that HDMI cable available 257 video device separately is connected 407 408 Problem Solution Page NEF RAW photos not displayed in Update to Capture NX 2 388 Capture NX Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off
144. ded Batteries Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning and should be removed with a soft dry cloth before use Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries Turn the product off before replacing the battery The battery may become hot when used for extended periods Observe due caution when handling the battery Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat After removing the battery from the camera be sure to replace the terminal cover Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL3e battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice On cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance Used batteries are a valuable resource Please recycle used batteries in accord with local regulations 401 402 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems bel
145. djusted from the shooting information display pg 15 ISO Sensitivity Settings Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings pp 106 108 Live View Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used when the camera is in live view mode pg 90 Multiple Exposure Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures pg 198 Interval Timer Shooting Take photographs automatically at pre selected intervals Use for time lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or butterflies emerging from cocoons pg 203 279 280 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences To display the Custom Settings press MENU and press lt q to highlight the tab for current menu then T press A or W to highlight the Custom i Decl s Settings tab for more information see AF activation page 26 5 Focus point wrap around Custom Setting groups ta k illumination AF point selection a b Meterina ex Ba 15O sensitivity step value y OEV steps for exposure otri i S 63 Exp comptine tune Main menu 24 Easy exposure compensation j b5 Center weighted area aG Fine tune cotimal exposure c1 Shuttertelease button AEL a Custom setting bank A son R Reset custom settings FF a Autofocus 4 eisime a b Metering exposure c Timers AE lock pe d Shooting display Bracketing fl
146. e 435 Image overlay 359 Image quality 58 Image quality 64 Image review 264 Image size 69 Image size 69 Index print 252 In focus indicator 53 72 Information 220 264 Interval timer shooting 203 Interval timer shooting 203 ISO sensitivity 105 106 108 ISO sensitivity settings 107 ISO sensitivity 107 ISO sensitivity auto control 108 Maximum sensitivity 108 Minimum shutter speed 108 ISO sensitivity step value 292 i TTL 184 185 311 377 J JPEG 64 67 JPEG basic 64 JPEG compression 67 Optimal quality 67 Size priority 67 JPEG fine 64 JPEG normal 64 L L 69 LAN 385 Language 38 334 LCD 48 302 332 LCD brightness 332 LCD illumination 302 Lens 36 210 346 347 370 attaching 36 cap 37 cap rear 36 37 compatible 370 CPU 37 373 distance information 184 focus mode switch 36 37 focus ring 37 81 mounting index 37 non CPU 210 data 211 removing 37 Lens mount 5 82 Live view 89 101 Live view 89 Live view mode 90 Hand held 90 Tripod 90 Release mode 91 Lo 107 Local area network 385 Lock mirror up for cleaning 395 Long exp NR 277 M M 72 81 94 121 M medium 69 Magenta 144 358 Manage Picture Control 168 Manual 72 81 94 121 Matrix 112 113 295 Max continuous release 299 MB D10 291 302 304 341 385 MB D10 battery type 302 Memory buffer 53 84 87 88 Memory card 41 332 390 capacity of 423 formatting 43 332 Metering 112 center wei
147. e Control combinations or copy custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card pg 168 Color Space Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces pg 181 275 276 Active D Lighting This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and shadows pg 179 Choose from Auto High Normal Low and Off the default setting Vignette Control Vignetting is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at maximum aperture Vignette control reduces vignetting for type Gand D lenses DX and PC lenses excluded Choose from High Normal the default setting Low and Off Vignette Control Depending on the scene shooting conditions and type of lens TIFF and JPEG images may exhibit unevenness or variations in peripheral brightness while custom Picture Controls and Nikon Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect Take test shots and view the results in the monitor Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures pg 198 DX format images pg 58 or images created with Image overlay pg 361 The effects of vignette control can not be previewed in live view pg 89 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter speeds Option Description Photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s are processed to red
148. e management Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or Cautions on certain copies and reproductions reproduced The government has issued cautions Do not copy or reproduce paper on copies or reproductions of money coins securities government securities issued by private companies bonds or local government bonds shares bills checks gift certificates even if such copies or reproductions etc commuter passes or coupon are stamped Sample tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is Prohibited issued by public agencies and private Unless the prior permission of the groups ID cards and tickets such as government has been obtained the passes and meal coupons copying or reproduction or unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as The copying or reproduction of stamps books music paintings woodcuts issued
149. e overlay 359 mc Side by side comparison 362 Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set Picture Control pg 162 349 350 Creating Retouched Copies Except in the case of Image overlay pg 359 and Side by side comparison pg 362 the photographs to be retouched can be selected in full frame playback as well as from the retouch menu EH Creating Retouched Copies in Full Frame Playback 1 Choosea picture Display the desired picture in full frame playback pg 218 2 Display the retouch menu x Diishting D Red eye correction Press to display the retouch menu Q Filter effects 2 Color balance Cancel 3 Select retouch options Highlight the desired item in ee the retouch menu and press gt ree to display retouch options for more information see the section for the selected item on the following pages To return to full frame playback without creating a retouched copy press PJ See Also See page 242 for information on using the button with the WT 4 wireless transmitter 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a amp 4 icon ll Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu 1 Select an item in the retouch menu Press A or to highlight an item gt to select Depending on the option selected a menu may be displayed highlight an option and press gt
150. e rate with continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer If MB D10 is used with AA batteries frame rate slows at low temperatures or when batteries are low 2 Maximum frame advance rate is 5 fps even when higher values are selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 299 3 Maximum frame rate in CL mode is 7 fps Buffer Size The approximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 33 pictures m 87 g 88 The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on the number of the images in the buffer recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off whi
151. e the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins e Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation xix A Observe proper precautions when handling the quick charger e Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock e Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands F
152. e values on the right Select ahii 0 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right 123 124 Long Time Exposures Ata shutter speed of tus 2 amp the shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is held down Use for long time exposure photographs of moving lights the stars night scenery or fireworks A tripod and optional remote cord are recommended to prevent blur 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface If you are using an optional remote cord attach it to the camera If you are not using a remote cord choose On for Custom Setting d9 Exposure delay mode pg 302 to prevent blur when the camera shutter release button is pressed Select exposure mode NM Press the MODE button MODE button and rotate the main command dial until M is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Main command dial Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are active rotate the main command dial until hu l a appears in the shutter speed displays The electronic analog exposure My displays do not appear when tis bi is selected 4 Press the shutter release button all the way down Press the shutter release button on the camera or remote cord all the way down The shutter will remain open while the shutter release button is pressed 5 Release the shutter r
153. e when the shutter is released See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection pg 283 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection pg 284 For information on preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter release button is pressed halfway see Custom Setting a5 AF activation pg 287 73 Le 74 AF Area Mode AF area mode determines how the focus point is selected in autofocus mode To select the AF area mode rotate the AF area mode selector The following options are available AF area mode selector Mode Description 2 User selects focus point manually camera focuses on Sinole subject in selected focus point only Use for relatively static 9 compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus point AF point e In continuous servo AF pg 72 user selects focus point manually if subject briefly leaves selected focus point camera will focus based on information from surrounding tJ points Number of focus points used can be selected from D acre 9 21 and 51 using Custom Setting a3 Dynamic AF area cles AE pg 285 If 51 points 3D tracking is selected for Custom Setting a3 focus point will be selected automatically using 3D tracking e Insingle servo AF user selects focus point manually camera focuses on subje
154. ean the filter Remove any dust and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 7 Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 396 M Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised e If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately m Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D700 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filt
155. eceiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D700 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION ATTENTION This Class B digital apparatus complies Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est with Canadian ICES 003 conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately The following apply only to users in European countries e This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate collection point Do not dispose of as household waste e For more information contact the retailer or the local authorities in charge of wast
156. ected by pressing the Fn button and rotating either of the command dials pg 285 None No operation is performed when the command dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed 323 324 f6 Assign Preview Button Choose the role played by the depth of field EDO preview button either by itself Preview mD V button press or when used in combination with the command dials Preview command dials The options available are the same as for FUNC button press pg 320 and FUNC button dials pg 323 except that the default option for Preview button press is Preview and the default setting for Preview command dials is None The Shooting Information Display The role of the depth of field preview button can also be selected in the shooting information display pg 15 f7 Assign AE L AF L Button Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button either by itself AE L AF L button press or when used in combination with the command dials AE L AF L command dials The options available for AE L AF L button press are the same as for FUNC button press pg 320 except that AE L AF L button press defaults to AE AF lock and has an additional AF ON option if this option is selected pressing the AE L AF L button has the same effect as pressing the AF 0N button to initiate autofocus The options available for AE L AF L command dials are the same as for FUNC button dials pg 323 except that AE L AF
157. ed Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue higher A values to increased amounts of amber pg 144 The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below No of White balance Control panel display shots increment Bracketing order EVs m r Ou diene sad 1 0 1 0 wd 1 HJE i 3 1B 1B 0 2B HJE i 3 1A 1A 2A 0 ber i 2 1B 0 1B HPF i 2 1A O 1A dP i 3 1A 1B 0 1A 1B GE i 5 1A 1B 0 2A 1A 1B 2B 0 3A 2A 1A EER ET i 1 t riiliii j 7 1A 1B 1B 2B 3B 0 4A 3A 2A 1A Ee A epeance GF ptccaitiiee 9 1A1B 1B 2B 3B 4B See Also See page 145 for a definition of mired 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot ay Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will havea different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the lly bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining the exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder will Fari ra release will be a M g can begin when a a JAN A 7 new memory card is inserted Ls _ maa H D PRALE E 137 138 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the
158. ed or uncompressed e TIFF RGB e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression available e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome storage for up to nine custom Picture Controls Media Type CompactFlash memory cards UDMA compliant File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 21 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 95 horizontal and 95 vertical Magnification Approx 0 72 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 18 mm 1 0 m7 Diopter adjustment 3 1m Focusing screen Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VI screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview When depth of field preview button is pressed lens aperture is stopped down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera F and S modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled Lens Compatible lenses e DX AF Nikkor All functions supported e Type G or D AF Nikkor
159. el Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 210 Use spot or center weighted metering if desired results are not achieved 6 For improved precision specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens data pg 210 7 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1 125 s Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting 9 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock or shifting lens In manual exposure mode preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens N gt v 10 Exposure compensation required when used with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details 11 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster 12 Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring PB 6D may be required depending on camera orientation 13 Use preset aperture In aperture priority auto exposure mode set aperture using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera Holder Compatible Non CPU Lenses If lens data are specified using Non CPU lens data pg 210 many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non CPU lens
160. elease button Remove your finger from the shutter release button to record the photograph Length of exposure 35 s Aperture f 25 Long Time Exposures Nikon recommends using a fully charged EN EL3e battery or an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open Note that noise and distortion may be present in long exposures before shooting choose On for the Long exp NR option in the shooting menu pg 277 125 Autoexposure AE Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 1 Select center weighted or Metering selector spot metering pg 112 ii Matrix metering will not produce the desired results with autoexposure lock If using center weighted metering select the center focus point with the multi selector pg 76 2 Lock exposure Shutter release RA ORE button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point press the AE L AF L button to lock exposure and focus except in manual focus mode Confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder 126 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed
161. ength ssesssssssesecsesssees 7 Lens data nn esesscsssseesscenseeseeene AF VR S VR O FLASH MODE a Bult in TTL 3 CMD M TTL 3 0 A TTL 3 0 B OFF Baii 12 235 8 Focus Mode ssssssssssssssssssssssssssrseee 72 349 Lens VR 112 vibration reduction 4 121 9 Flash MOde seecsseeeees ia 121 Flash compensation 114 10 Commander mode group 106 name flash control mode flash 128 COMPENSATION uu eesssessssscsseessees 311 294 11 Camera name 376 12 Folder number 210 frame number P sesesssccccsssssseeeses 272 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 264 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 Fine tune optimal exposure pg 294 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached 5 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu 225 BE Shooting Data Page 2 226 On AUN COLOR SPACE PICTURE CNTRL QUICK ADJUST SHARPENING CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 SSS5U5 1 1 1 Protect Status ceseeseeees 235 2 Retouch indicator 349 3 White balance 139 Color temperature 147 White balance fine tuning 143 Preset MANUAl ceccsseecceseeeeeee 148 4 Color SPACE we cessesesscsssseceensnsecs 181 5 Picture Contr
162. ent 159 Picture COntrOlS sssssesssssessssssisssscorsasssorsnsssusasnsenonroassansausastsussasdesaasnessas 160 Creating Custom Picture ControlS ssssssssssssrrssssssreesssssssese 168 Active D LIQhting sssssssssssssssssssssosssssseescssorsssvorssseessssnerssrseerseseess 179 Color Space isvccsssccissisacsscanscansecconscacassiessanisccicsiestsaichcadandeanbacennsincsatiadtas 181 Flash Photography 183 The Built in Flash ue eesssssssssecssscesscsessecsssecenscessseecasccsscecsneecsneeesseeess 184 Using the Built in Flash esssssssssssescesssesesssecsssseeeecsneeecsneessnssess 185 FLAS MOGGS wndcscsaiiccecassassieschccussecvavessacdvayelasenesvusevesduavencaectolensetveavactons 188 Flash Compensation secsssecsesssssccssssecseecsseecesccesscecsncceseeceatecsaseesees 190 FV LOCK isisisi aniani aiaia 192 Other Shooting Options 195 Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings sssr 196 Multiple EXPOSULE nnssssssssssssssssssesssesssssssssesesesessssssssreesessessssresressesssssss 198 Interval Timer Photography ssssssssssssssssssssssesssstsssssssesessssstsesssssse 203 Non CPU LemSOS stessssssscsssdessiacasestacevacessaviessanssessntivensctadativnnvasdectanavdes 210 USING a GPS UMIT sissi sssr a a E S 213 More About Playback 217 Full Frame Playback ssssssssssccssssccsseseccsssscesssceessseecsnsesecsnseeessseeess Photo INFOrMAtION ceccssscsssecsssccsssccescccsscessccessccesuccesseceseecessecssseesse Viewing Mul
163. er where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications m Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly lA recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced 397 398 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immer
164. er EH 5a EH 5 These AC adapters can be used to power the camera for extended periods Wireless LAN adapters Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or a second EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details 385 386 Viewfinder eyepiece accessories e DK 17C Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses with Safety Lock To accommodate individual differences in vision viewfinder lenses are available with diopters of 3 2 0 1 2 m Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m Test diopter adjustment lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved Magnifying Eyepiece DK 17M with Safety Lock The DK 17M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 2 x for greater precision when framing Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder Use for close up photography copying telephoto lenses and other tasks that call for added precision DK 18 eyepiece adapter available separately
165. es If lens data are not specified color matrix metering can not be used and center weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected Non CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M when aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture has not been specified using Non CPU lens data the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring Aperture priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and The exposure mode indicator F or 5 in the control panel will blink and A will be displayed in the viewfinder m Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D700 e TC 16AS AF teleconverter e AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm e Non Al lenses f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED e Lenses that require the AU 1 AF Teleconverter TC 16 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm_ PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 or earlier e Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 e PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 851001 906200 e 2 1cm f 4 e PC 35mm f 3 5 old type e Extension Ring K2 e Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type e 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 174041 174180 142361 143000 e 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial e Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers numbers 174031 174127 2
166. ex Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index New Features Question Key phrase See page How do take pictures in FX format Image area 58 How do take high quality NEF RAW 14 bit NEF RAW 68 photos Can use the monitor as a viewfinder Live view 89 Can control how photos are processed Picture Controls 160 How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights Active D Lighting 179 How do focus on erratically moving 3D tracking 286 subjects How do tell if the camera is level Virtual horizon 99 346 Can adjust focus separately for AF fine tune 347 different lenses How do I remove dust from the low pass Gidamimage sensor 392 filter protecting the image sensor Camera Setup Question Key phrase See page Diopter adjustment control How do I focus the viewfinder 45 How do I keep the monitor from turning off Monitor off delay 297 Question Key phrase See page How do keep the shutter speed and Autemmerecort 48 296 aperture displays from turning off Can display a framing grid in the ae hy viewfinder Viewfinder grid display 298 How do I set the clock How do I set the clock for daylight savings time World time 39 334 How do I change time zones when travel How do I adjust monitor brightness for LCD brightness 332 menus or playback How do res
167. exposure information shown in the electronic analog exposure display is affected shutter speed and aperture do not change To choose a value for exposure compensation press the 4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder button 0 EV 0 3 EV 2 0 EV i button pressed 128 Exposure compensation can be set to values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 1 3 EV In general choose positive values to make the subject brighter negative values to make it darker 1EV No exposure compensation At values other than 0 the 0 at the center of the electronic analog exposure displays will flash and a H4icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 292 For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the button see Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 293 129 130 Bracketing The camera offers three types of bracketing exposure bracketing flash bracketing and white balance bracketing In exposure bracketing pg 131
168. fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as amp incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature compensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 145 146 Hl The WB Button At settings other than i Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis pg 144 to fine tune white balance when I or PRE is selected use the shooting menu as described on page 144 Six settings in both directions are available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired pg 145 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial
169. for more information on thumbnails the thumbnail display Zoom in on Q See page 234 for more information on photograph playback zoom 2 Confirmation dialog will be displayed Delete images T Press again to delete photo Change To protect image or to remove protect On protection from protected image press status O n button pg 235 peels Io Monitor will turn off Photographs 9 can be taken immediately mode Display menus MENU See page 259 for more information Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pg 265 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s the default setting after shooting In single frame self timer and mirror up release modes photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 297 EE The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed so that the A and Y buttons display other images and the lt and gt buttons control photo information See Custom Setting f4 Photo info playback pg 320 for details 219 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback There are up to 9 pages of informat
170. fway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data rea ter enciak and the message shown at right will be settings and ty again displayed Choose another reference object and repeat the process from step 1 1 Exoosure settings are not v Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera histograms and highlights are not displayed 339 340 Battery Info View information on the battery currently Bil Battery info inserted in the camera Bat meter Pic meter L 4 T Charging life 0 0 4 L fa Done Item Description Bat meter The current battery level expressed as a percentage Pic meter The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a
171. g via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order Images created at image quality settings of NEF RAW pg 64 can not be selected for printing using this option Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D100 video cable can be used to connect the camera to a television or VCR for playback or recording A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from commercial sources can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices To connect the camera to a standard television 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the video cable Connect the supplied video cable as shown Connect to camera Connect to video device Tune the television to the video channel Turn the camera on and press gt button During playback images will be displayed both on the television screen or recorded to video tape and the camera monitor 255 256 Video Mode pg 333 Be sure that the video standard matches the standar
172. ge m Image Dust Off The Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 can not use dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed to retouch photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed If you intend to use Image Dust Off with photographs recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed we recommend that you record dust off reference data after cleaning the image sensor Image Sensor Cleaning If the options described in this section are not sufficient to remove dust or other foreign objects from the image sensor clean the sensor manually as described on page 395 3 Select Clean now Highlight Clean now and press gt The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress The message shown at right will be displayed when cleaning is complete HE Clean at Startup Shutdown iy Clean image sensor t Cleannow 5 E Clean at startup shutdown Clean image sensor Cleaning image sensor Clean image sensor 1 Select Clean at startup shutdown Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and press gt Clean image sensor Y Gean now Clean at startup shutdown gt 393 2 Select an option BB Clean imase sensor Clean at startup shutdown Highlight one of the following Y GON Clean at startup options and press i GFF Clean at
173. ghted 112 294 295 matrix 112 113 295 selector 51 113 spot 112 295 Mired 145 Mirror 89 104 395 lock up for cleaning 395 Modeling flash 315 Monitor 12 55 89 218 332 cover 21 Monitor off delay 297 Monochrome 357 Black and white 357 Cyanotype 357 Sepia 357 Mounting index 37 Multi selector 319 Multi selector center button 318 Multiple exposure 198 Multiple exposure 198 My Menu 364 Add items 364 Rank items 367 Remove items 366 N NEF 64 67 NEF RAW 64 68 NEF RAW recording 67 NEF RAW bit depth 68 12 bit 68 14 bit 68 Type 67 Compressed 67 Lossless compressed 67 Uncompressed 67 Nikon Transfer 238 No memory card 329 Non CPU lens data 210 0 Optional flash 309 320 Overview data 230 P Photo info 220 264 441 Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold Photo info playback 320 PictBridge 244 435 Picture angle 58 376 Picture Controls 160 Playback 55 217 folder 263 full frame 218 information 220 264 menu 260 slide show 266 thumbnail 232 zoom 234 Playback folder 263 Predictive 73 Print DPOF 249 Border 251 Page size 251 Start printing 251 Time stamp 251 Print options PictBridge Setup menu 247 Border 247 Cropping 248 No of copies 247 Page size 247 Start printing 248 Time stamp 247 Print select 249 Border 251 Page size 251 Start printing 251 Time stamp 251 Print set DPOF 243
174. ghts for current channel Press lt or gt while pressing 9 button to cycle through channels as follows RGB R G B gt lt gt all channels red green blue Highlight display off 3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu Ca 223 4 Some sample histograms are shown below e If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even e If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left e If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right nage Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the monitor Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications 224 BE Shooting Data Page 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 Protect StatUS sess 2 Retouch indicator 3 Metering method Shutter speed eee 118 Aperture on ecscescssscsssseeenenee 119 4 Exposure MOE csessseessesssees ISO sensitivity 2 esc 5 Exposure compensation Optimal exposure tuning 6 Focal l
175. h 36 Amber 144 358 Aperture 119 122 maximum 82 210 minimum 37 114 Aperture priority auto 119 Assign AE L AF L button 325 Assign FUNC button 320 Assign preview button 324 Auto bracketing 130 315 316 Auto bracketing Mode M 316 Auto bracketing set 315 AE amp flash 315 AE only 315 Flash only 315 WB bracketing 315 Auto DX Crop 58 Auto FP high speed sync 305 306 377 Auto image rotation 336 Auto meter off 48 296 Auto meter off delay 296 Auto area AF 74 75 Autofocus 72 74 76 78 80 B Backlight 48 302 Battery 32 34 46 302 304 340 charging 32 pack 302 304 341 385 Battery info 340 Battery order 304 Beep 298 Body cap 5 36 388 Bracketing 130 315 316 exposure 130 315 316 flash 130 315 316 white balance 130 135 Bracketing order 317 Built in AF assist illuminator 290 Bulb 122 124 Burst 200 299 321 c C 72 79 283 285 Camera Control Pro 2 239 388 Capture NX 2 64 172 337 388 Center weighted 112 294 295 Center weighted area 294 CL mode shooting speed 299 Clean image sensor 392 Clock 39 334 battery 40 CLS 377 Color balance 358 Color space 181 Adobe RGB 181 sRGB 181 Color temperature 141 142 147 CompactFlash 41 332 390 Computer 238 Control panel 8 Copyright information 343 CPU lens 37 370 Creative Lighting System 377 Custom setting bank 282 Custom Settings 280 Customize command dials 326 D Date and time 39 334 Day
176. h mode Front curtain sync slow sync rear curtain sync red eye reduction red eye reduction with slow sync Flash compensation 3 1 EV in increments of 3 2 or 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when built in flash or Speedlight such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DX or SB 50DX is fully charged blinks after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe Standard ISO 518 hot shoe contact with safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in flash System CLS SB 900 SB 800 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP High Speed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units Sync terminal Standard ISO 519 terminal White balance White balance Auto TTL white balance with main image sensor and 1 005 segment RGB sensor 7 manual modes with fine tuning color temperature setting Live view Modes Hand held tripod Autofocus e Hand held Phase detection AF with 51 focus points including 15 cross type sensors e Tripod Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame Monitor Monitor 3 in 920k dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment P
177. h photographs will be incorrect 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Select Language Press MENU to display the camera menus then select Language in the setup menu For information on using menus see Using Camera Menus pg 28 MENU button p S Nikon a SETUP MENU Format memory card LCD brightness y Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode HOMI World time 3 Selecta language Press A or W to highlight the desired language and press py Language De Deutsch Es Espa ol Fi Suomi Fr Fransais It Italiano NI Nederlands PI Polski 4 Select World time SETUP MENU Format memory card r LCD brightness Select World time and press gt chen nana sae Y Lock mirror up for deaning S Video mode HOMI E Language 5 Set time zone E World time a Time zone Date and time A time zone selection dialog Dats format will be displayed Press lt or gt fee to highlight the local time zone the UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 6 Turn daylight saving time E Word time Daylight saving time on or Off Daylight saving time options will be displayed Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone press A to highlight On and press
178. harge indoors at ambient temperatures in the vicinity of 5 35 C 41 95 F for best results charge the battery at temperatures above 20 C 68 F Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged If the battery is charged at a temperature below 5 C 41 F the battery life indicator in the Battery info pg 340 display may show a temporary decrease The battery may be hot immediately after use Wait for the battery to cool before recharging Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use m Incompatible Batteries This camera can not be used with EN EL3 or EN EL3a rechargeable Li ion batteries for the D100 D70 series or D50 or with the MS D70 CR2 battery holder EN EL3e Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL3e shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels pg 46 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged pg 340 35 36 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed T Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap After confirming that the camera is off remove the rear lens cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap 2 At
179. he GPS device is searching for a signal pictures taken while the amp icon is flashing will not include GPS data EE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether or not the exposure meters will turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached Option Description Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2 Enable Auto meter off delay This reduces the drain on the default battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if the shutter release button is pressed all the way down without pausing Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is connected GPS data will always be recorded Disable e Position This item is only available if a GPS device is connected when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude Coordinated Universal Time UTC and heading as reported by the GPS device Heading The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is equipped with a digital compass Keep the GPS device pointing in the same direction as the lens and at least 20cm 8in from the camera Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock 215 216 More About Playback Playback Options This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details the operat
180. he default setting and a 35mm format lens is attached the picture angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film 36 0 x 23 9 mm if a DX lens is attached the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to 23 5 x 15 6 mm DX format To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens turn Auto DX crop off and select FX format 36 x 24 or DX format 24 x 16 Ifa 35 mm format lens is attached the picture angle could be reduced by 1 5 x by selecting DX format 24 x 16 exposing a smaller area FX format 36 x 24 picture size 36 0 x 23 9 mm equivalent to 35mm format camera Picture diagonal Lens DX format 24 x 16 picture size 23 5 x 15 6 mm equivalent to DX format camera Picture angle FX format 36 x 24 35mm format Picture angle DX format 24 x 16 DX format The DX format 24 x 16 picture angle is about 1 5 times smaller than the 35mm format picture angle To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when DX format 24 x 16 is selected multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 for example the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX format 24 x 16 is selected Optional Flash Units Speedlights The D700 can be used with CLS compatible flash units Remove the accessory shoe cover when attaching optional flash units The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached
181. hotograph focus and shoot Shutter speed 1 125 s Aperture f 5 6 AF Micro Nikkor Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture Electronic Analog Exposure Displays The electronic analog exposure displays in the control panel and viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 292 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 1 3 EV 2 EV or 1 EV If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash Custom Setting b2 set to 1 3 step Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV Control panel Briedis i Viewfinder ae Da If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure at the shutter speed or aperture selected in mode Sor A 4 i or a will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder and the electronic analog exposure display will show the amount by which the image will be under or over exposed See Also If Fahira 9 the default setting is selected for Custom Setting f12 Reverse indicators pg 330 the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negativ
182. ic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 51 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 80 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark 6 on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in TY O00 DD i Focal plane mark Release Mode Single Frame Continuous Live View Self Timer or Mirror Up Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs one ata time in a continuous sequence with the view through the lens displayed in the monitor with a timed shutter release delay f amp or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration Choosing a Release MOde cssscscscssssscecssscseceeecseees pg 84 Continuous MOGEoivcrccrscccsncccsesco
183. ickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves the viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point f 3D ZA 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject Option Description AFE Long When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the Normal camera waits for the specified period long normal or AFE default short before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance Off to the subject changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession AFE Short a5 AF Activation This option controls whether both the shutter release button and the AF ON button can be used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus is only initiated when the AF 0N but
184. ide Image Hide or reveal selected pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or reveal selected pictures Deselect all Reveal all pictures 7 Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image 263 264 Display Mode Choose the information available in the a Disolay mode playback photo information display pg 220 Press A or W to highlight an T O Focus point option then press to select the option for PRran onn the photo information display A Y appears next to selected items to deselect highlight O RGB histogram O Data 2 and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press gt Option Description Basic photo info Focus point Active focus point or in single servo AF focus point where focus first locked is shown in red in photo information display No focus point is displayed if camera was unable to focus using continuous servo autofocus or if continuous servo autofocus was used with auto area AF o etailed photo info Highlights Highlights for master RGB channel and for individual red green and blue channels are shown in photo information display Very bright areas blink on and off RGB Red green and blue histograms are displayed in photo histogram i
185. iew sssscsssecsseeesees 89 Self Timer Mode Mirror up MOE cecssescsssccsssccssssecsecsscecsssecsscccsuccesuccessecessecsnseessseestecs ISO Sensitivity 105 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually sssssssscsssesccseesecsseecesees 106 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control oo essssseescesesccsseecsseescessececuseesensees 108 Exposure 111 Meteri G ssccssesssscscccssusiccassesorscstsuszeassccsecastsuazenssoabaitescuattvaiacecrosstbaacsanesnce Exposure Mode wu sesecsssessssccssecesssccssescesccesscecssecssnccescessusecsnceesaecsneesess P Programmed AUtO sssssssscessseseccesssseseesssseeesessnsessessssesseesene 5 Shutter Priority AUtO essssssssecsecssseesecesseesseessseesesssseseeseseee A Aperture Priority Auto PT Mati tlall sicacssgscisscestussscaavanssaseceeuscssunsssensayesrecalgndsatetesaeassasvessnvebececcs xi xii Long TiM EXPOSUTES ssisiisiissississississssisissaisissssssnssassassississssssississssss 124 Autoexposure AE LOCK sssesssssssesessesoesesososeoseseoseoseoooseoseoeeseeeesee 126 Exposure COMpensation sssssssssssssessessesssesesesessssssseseoesrssssssssseesees 128 Bracketing White Balance 139 White Balance Options sscsssscsssccssccssecsseccescecsseessecsseecsneeesssees 140 Fine Tuning White Balance ssssssssssssesssssssessssesesssssstesessssrsssssssees 143 Choosing a Color Temperature n sesccssssesssssesesssesscnseescenseeessees 147 Preset Manual Image Enhancem
186. ight Approx 995 g 2 19 Ib without battery memory card body cap or monitor cover Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 18a quick charger Rated input AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Rated output DC 8 4 V 900 mA Supported batteries Nikon EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Charging time Approx 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully discharged Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 90 x 35 x 58 mm 3 5 x 1 4 x 2 3 in Length of cord Approx 1800 mm 5 ft 11 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding power cable EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 4 V 1500 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 39 5 x 56 x 21 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz excluding terminal cover Supported Standards e DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File System DCF is a standard
187. ight behind moving objects In programmed auto and aperture priority auto slow Lon rear curtain sync is used to capture both subject and REAR background Use of tripod is recommended to Slow rear curtain prevent blurring caused by camera shake sync Flash Control Mode The shooting information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash Built in and for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe Optional as follows i TTL Auto aperture AA Manual Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional 4 m a 4 m w AA LEU Auto FP o J gt L YIA eR pg 306 FP FP FP Repeating 4 flash RPT RPT comme et el tT fool F mode CMD CND 1 Available with SB 900 and SB 800 only 2 Flash control mode for built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 309 See Also See Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 305 for information on flash sync speeds as fast as 1 320 s 189 190 Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the E button and rotate the sub command dial u
188. ignment 320 36 AE L AF L button ASSIQGNMENL 1 esseecsescssenseesseeseees 325 37 Picture Control indicatov 163 38 Long exposure noise reduction TNGICATOL ee escesseeesccsssetececnseseceesene 277 39 Custom settings bank 282 40 Shooting menu bank 41 High ISO noise reduction INGICATON sesseesssesseessesssessseeseessees 278 42 FV lock indicator uu 193 43 Flash Mode 185 189 44 Clock not set indicator 40 410 EE The Quick Settings Display To change settings for the items listed below press the HM button in the shooting information display Highlight items using the multi selector and press to jump to the menu for the highlighted item 1 Active D Lighting s s s 180 6 Picture CONntrol eseseseeseeees 162 2 Color SPaCe eesescscsseccseeeeseeeees 181 7 Long exposure noise 3 Depth of field preview button reduUCt ON sssssssssssssssressssresseeessssree 277 ASSIGNMENK scosseccssseccssteceeeeeers 324 8 Custom settings bank 282 4 Fn button assignment 320 9 Shooting menu bank 269 5 AE L AF L button 10 High ISO noise reduction 278 ASSIQNMENA sesseeeseeeseesseesseesees 325 Viewing Button Assignments and 68 icons indicate the button press function pg 320 performed respectively by the depth of field preview button Fn button and AE L AF L button The button dials f
189. including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation but excluding image comments and copyright information and values for white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1 Overlays saved in NEF RAW format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression Vignette control pg 276 does not apply even if both the original images were created using vignette control 361 362 Side by Side Comparison Compare retouched copies to the original photographs BE Making a Side by Side Comparison 1 Selecta picture Use the multi selector to select a picture and press Only retouched copies shown by a Eicon or photographs that have been retouched can be selected 2 Select Side by side comparison Highlight Side by side comparison and press 3 Compare the copy with the Options used to original created copy The source image is displayed on the left the retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press the multi selector in the direction indicated by the arrow adjacent to the highlighted image A V lt or P to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view the highlighted picture full frame
190. ing Custom Picture Controls Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture Controls BE Renaming Custom Picture Controls 1 Select Rename In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Rename and press P iy Manage Picture Control a Save edit Delete Load save 2 Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press b gt eset V1V1D 02 D C2 STANDARD 02 3 Rename the Picture Control Rename the Picture Control as described on page 170 Rename 4 TA Le 1 S 4 a 0123456789 lt Y gt 7 BBCDEFGHIJKL WNOPORSTUVWXYZ E auror input WOK 175 EE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera 1 Select Delete In the Manage Picture Control menu highlight Delete and press gt iy Manage Picture Control a Save edit s Rename O Load save Select a Picture Control Highlight a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt By Manage Picture Control _ g Delete E01 VIVID 02 j MVM STANDARD 02 A w Select Yes Highlight Yes and press to delete the selected Picture Control py Manage Picture Control g Delete F Delete Picture Control STANDARD 02 Nikon Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera Standard Neutral Vivid and Monochrome can not be renamed or deleted 176 HE Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the
191. ing increment 136 Number of shots per interval h scessccissecctsiishentenaseseous 206 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses wcsessccsseeeeees 212 14 Aperture stop indicator 120 373 15 Flash compensation MACAO iana 190 16 Exposure compensation iNdicatOt asenne 128 17 Flash sync indicator s 305 18 ISO sensitivity indicato 106 Auto ISO sensitivity TNGICATON aeesssseeccssseecccnseserssseesens 108 19 Clock not set indicator 40 410 20 MB D10 battery indicator 304 21 Battery indicator sssr 46 22 Interval timer indicator 206 23 Electronic analog exposure display Exposure compensation Exposure and flash bracketing progress INGICATOP esaa 131 WB bracketing progress TNGICATON vasisi Tilt INI CATON eee eeecsseteseesseeeenees Beep indicator GPS connection indicatot 214 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 0 WB bracketing indicator 27 Aperture lock iCON esseeesseeceees 28 Color temperature indicator 147 24 25 26 The Viewfinder Display OGG 000000 oo 2000 J OO OO OCG OOO o O OC 3 10 w N woe onauw A 10 11 12 13 14 15 vV Framing grid displaye
192. ints indicator AF area mode indicator 3D tracking indicator White balance essences White balance fine tuning TCI CATON eesscsssessccssseesecensseeeneene 146 Image Quality esses 64 IMAGE SIZE escnescsscsesenesesssrsccnseoes 69 Vignette control Release mode single frame continuous indicator 84 Continuous shooting speed 87 Flash sync indicator 13 14 The Shooting Information Display Continued 21 2223 24 25 2627 Bl n 1808888 cPsiopy 44 o OA PLOCKIINT VLE i 30 43 sit memm 31 feel FP 42 33 40 SHOOT PSone a E o O 34 E moo 33 39 CUSTOM e ES E En 35 21 ISO sensitivity indicator 106 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 22 Exposure compensation indicator 23 Flash compensation MA CATO isisssisossiseisisessissssinsa 190 24 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator es WB bracketing indicator 135 25 GPS connection indicator 214 26 Metering n ssercssccescssssscsrseenesess 112 27 Beep indicator 298 28 Multiple exposure indicator 200 29 Interval timer indicator 206 30 Copyright Information TCI CATON eeeesssssseseccecssseesecenssees 343 31 Image comment indicator 335 38 37 36 32 Active D Lighting indicator 180 33 Color space indicato 181 34 Depth of field preview button ASSIGNMENT uu esseecseecseesseesseeseees 324 35 Fn button ass
193. ion for each photo Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display mode pg 264 shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photograph as described on page 343 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken NIKON D700 LATITUDE iN gS 36 371 LONGITUDE SE 139 43 696 ALTITUDE 35m P 1 250 F11 3200 TIME UTC ea MBAUTO 00 sRGB SD 100ND700 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 100ND700 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 07 2008 10 02 27 T4256x2832 15 07 2008 10 02 27 1T4256x2832 File Information Overview Data GPS Data 5 a kO A ARTIST KOUGAKU TARO COPYRIGHT NIKON 100 1 RGB Histogram Shooting Data pages 1 3 Shooting Data page 4 220 HE File Information 6 13 7 1 al ji 12 11 109 8 1 Protect Status esses 235 7 Image quality 0 esesssssetecseneee 64 2 Retouch indicator 349 8 IMAGE SIZO on eeeesssesscsstecesneeeeenseees 69 3 Focus point 9 Image area 2 eesccssssssccssssseccsecsssees 58 4 AF area brackets 10 Image authentication 342 5 Frame number 11 Time of recording sssr 38 total number of frames 12 Date of recording 38 6 File NAME eeecsessseesssescssecsseecsees 274 13 Folder namMe ceccccesccsesssseecseeeeees
194. ions that can be performed during playback Full Frame Playback scssscssssssscsssscssscsssscecesssecseees pg 218 Photo Information scsccscsesecscccscsecesscscsssececsseceeees pg 220 Viewing Multiple Images Thumbnail Playback pg 232 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZoomM ss000 pg 234 Protecting Photographs from Deletion 00 pg 235 Deleting Individual PhotograpN s cesecssseees pg 236 217 Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the I button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor Sub command dial T button button MENU butto O n button amp button Q button _ 12 button Main command dial Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu pg 265 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 219 218 To Use Description View Key Press gt to view photographs in order additional lt O recorded lt to view photographs in photographs lt gt reverse order View photo Press A or to view information information about current photograph pg 220 View qE See page 232
195. is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual Camera Body 1 Release mode dial sees 85 8 BS 1 accessory shoe cover 377 2 Release mode dial 9 Power switch essessseessesseessesseees 46 lock rel aSe nssssessssssssssessosesseseee 85 10 Shutter release button 53 54 3 QUAL image quality size 11 G4 exposure compensation DUTTON iiiam 65 70 10 0 lt 0 128 Two button reset button 196 Two button reset button 196 4 Eyelet for camera strap 21 12 MODE exposure mode 5 WB white balance UTM isistsivsscctesdscossedessecinastonsanvtsas 115 button ecceessssseeesseeee 141 146 147 nm format DUTTON ceseesseeeee 43 6 ISO ISO sensitivity button 106
196. is copied from photo on memory photograph card pg 154 148 The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset pg 158 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance pg 150 This preset is overwritten when a new value is measured By White balance d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 pg 153 Store values copied Se Wite balance from images on ia Select image memory card pg 154 White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks pg 269 A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank no warning is displayed for preset d 0 149 150 EE Measuring a Value for White Balance 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in exposure mode M adjust exposure so that the electronic analog exposure displays shows 0 pg 123 2 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel WB button Main command dial
197. isplayed in the control panel The Image Size Menu QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the shooting menu pg 268 70 Focus Controlling How the Camera Focuses This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses FocusMode eener testaria eeka eatea se EEEE ree arees Te pg 72 AFAreaMode cine ccccsscevssentsvecessosestescssestscoscsesesseesenceceseseesees pg 74 Focus Point Selection scsscessssscosssesssssceserenssseceseses pg 76 BOGUSLOCKicvccsccscsccssssoceencsecsaccssrsersvcsensssacescsoeststesccsessesasseerse pg 78 Mana FOCUS veccsecscescececerccssscssesessencseveessosesveteccesessesvecesest pg 81 71 Focus Mode Focus mode is controlled by the Focus mode selector focus mode selector on the front of the camera There are two autofocus AF modes in which the camera focuses automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and one manual focus mode in which focus must be adjusted manually using the focusing ring on the lens Option Description Camera focuses when shutter y release button is pressed halfway ae Focus locks when in focus indicator appears in S viewfinder and remains locked Single servo while shutter release button is AF pressed halfway focus lock At Focus default settings sh
198. ith the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 and SU 800 Flash unit Advanced Wireless Lighting Commander Remote SB 900 SB 900 SB 900 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 SB 800 SU 800 SB 800 SB 600 SB R200 TTL parse ei ee y jev viv vw iw AA Auto aperture YF Ri ww A Non TTL auto Ye R gt r GN Distance priority manual M Manual Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv RPT Repeating flash Y l lYr Vv Vv Y Auto FP High Speed Sync Y Y WY YU Yiv FV lock CO a a a a A AF assist for multi area AF Y iv iv jg Flash Color Information v v v Z Communication REAR _ Rear curtain sync Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Red eye reduction Y Yv Y Yv Auto zoom Y Yv vY Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit Non TTL auto A selected automatically if non CPU lens is attached without specifying lens data using Non CPU lens data 6 Selected with flash unit 7 Select 1 320 s Aut
199. itter See Connections Wireless and Ethernet Networks pg 242 341 342 Image Authentication Choose whether to embed image authentication information in new photographs as they are taken allowing alterations to be detected using Nikon s optional Image Authentication software Image authentication information can not be embedded in existing photographs Photographs taken with image authentication on are marked with a fg icon on the file information and overview pages of the photo information display pp 221 231 Option Description Image authentication information embedded in new N On photographs as they are taken Off Image authentication information not embedded in new default photographs A Camera Control Pro 2 Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF RGB photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Copies Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created using the options in the retouch menu pg 349 Copyright Information Add a copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is visible on the fourth page of the photo information display pg 228 and can be viewed using ViewNxX supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately pg 388 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 270 Photographer na
200. ituations 295 296 c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway c2 Auto Meter off Delay This option controls how long the camera Option continues to meter exposure when no ys 4s operations are performed Choose from 4s 6s 6s default 6s 8s 16s 305s 1 minute 5 minutes Dgs 8s 10 minutes 30 minutes or until the camerais lis 16s turned off No limit The shutter speed and Dls 30s aperture displays in the control panel and lim 1min viewfinder turn off automatically when the Sdn 5min exposure meters turn off Diin 10 min Din 30 min o No limit Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life When the camera is powered by an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter the auto meter off delay is equivalent to No limit c3 Self Timer Delay This option controls the length of the shutter release delay in self timer mode Choose from 25 55 10s and 20s c4 Monitor off Delay This option controls how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed during playback image review or when menus or shooting information is displayed Choose from 4 s the default for image review 10 s the default for playback and shooting information 20 s the default for menus 1 minute
201. layback Playback Full frame and thumbnail four or nine images playback with playback zoom slide show highlights histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Interface USB Hi Speed USB Video output Can be selected from NTSC and PAL HDMI output Type C mini pin HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Ten pin remote terminal Can be used to connect remote control or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183 version 2 01 or 3 01 requires optional MC 35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D sub 9 pin connector Supported languages Supported languages Chinese Simplified and Traditional Dutch English Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL3e battery Battery pack Optional MB D10 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e EN EL4a or EN EL4 Li ion battery or eight AA alkaline NiMH lithium or nickel manganese batteries EN EL4a EN EL4 and AA batteries available separately A BL 3 battery chamber cover is required when using EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries AC adapter EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 433 434 Dimensions weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 147 x 123 x 77 mm 5 8 x 4 8 x 3 0 in We
202. le data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d5 Max continuous release pg 299 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 423 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live View Select live view mode to frame pictures in the monitor Rotate the release mode dial to Choose live view options in shooting menu pg 90 A Hand held pg 93 Tripod pg 96 display view F S Frame a picture in the through lens in AW viewfinder and focus monitor wr 8 POAST Raise mirror and Raise mirror and Frame picture in monitor display view through lens in EN monitor Focus Mirror clicks down and monitor turns off Focus Check view in monitor Press button to Monitor turns on when shutter zoom in and release button is pressed check focus Take pictures Take pictures 89 90 Live View Options Before taking pictures using live view rotate aE the mode dial to live view and choosea_ f live view mode a
203. le interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During Shooting During interval timer photography the iconin the control panel will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Bi interval timer shooting Interval timer shooting between shots While A Start an interval timer photography is in progress the gt oft interval timer menu will show the starting time 10 05 the current time and the number of intervals and 00 01 00 shots remaining None of these items can be changed while interval timer photography is in progress BE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval time photog
204. lease mode dial to Ly Release mode dial 3 Framea picture in AF ON button the viewfinder Frame a picture in the viewfinder and select a focus point using the multi selector then press the AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the camera can not be focused by pressing the shutter release button halfway 4 Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU 5 Check the view in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x and check focus press the amp button amp button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor Press to exit Zoom Autofocus focus mode S or C In tripod mode the focus point for contrast detect autofocus can be moved to any point in the frame using the multi selector To focus using contrast detect autofocus press the AF ON button The focus point will blink green and the monitor may brighten while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus using
205. lected in continuous servo AF focus mode C pg 72 the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Choose the number of focus points from 9 21 and 51 based on subject movement Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the pg 9 Points camera will focus based on information from the default surrounding eight focus points Choose when Grist there is time to compose the photograph or when 2 photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track i If the subject leaves the selected focus point the 121 21 points camera will focus based on information from the E a surrounding 20 focus points Choose when 8 fe photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game If the subject leaves the selected focus point the 8151 51 points camera will focus based on information from the one e surrounding 50 focus points Choose when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds 285 286 Option Description If the subject leaves the selected focus point the camera will use 3D tracking to track the subject 51 points and select a new focus point as required Use to 3D tracking qu
206. light saving time 39 334 DCF version 2 0 182 435 Default settings 196 271 282 418 restoring 196 271 282 Delete 56 236 262 all images 262 current image 56 236 selected images 262 Delete 262 All 262 Selected 262 Depth of field 115 Depth of field preview button 115 315 324 Digital Print Order Format 243 249 253 435 Diopter 45 386 adjustment control 45 Display mode 264 D Lighting 354 DPOF 243 249 253 435 Dust off ref photo 337 DX format 24x16 59 Dynamic AF area 285 51 points 3D tracking 286 Dynamic area AF 74 75 285 E Easy exposure compensation 293 Electronic analog exposure display 123 Ethernet 242 385 EV steps for exposure cntrl 292 Exif version 2 21 182 435 Exp comp fine tune 292 Exposure 111 112 126 128 lock 126 meters 48 296 mode 114 aperture priority auto 119 manual 121 programmed auto 116 shutter priority auto 118 program 426 Exposure bracketing 130 315 316 Exposure compensation 128 Exposure delay mode 302 Eyepiece shutter lever 45 102 205 F File information 221 File naming 274 File number sequence 300 Filter effects 358 Skylight 358 Warm filter 358 Fine tune optimal exposure 294 Firmware version 348 Flash 185 188 190 192 bracketing 130 315 316 compensation 190 control 184 377 i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR 184 377 standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 184 mode 188 439 Menu items and options in
207. lity JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression File Size See page 423 for information on the number of pictures that can be recorded at different image quality and size settings 64 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel The Image Quality Menu Main command dial 547 Control panel Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the shooting menu pg 268 65 66 NEF RAW Recording The NEF RAW recording item in the shooting menu controls compression pg 67 and bit depth pg 68 for NEF RAW images JPEG Compression JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal image quality The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can be used to choose the type of compression pg 67 NEF RAW JPEG When photographs taken at NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic are viewed on the camera only the JPEG image will be displayed When photographs taken at these settings are deleted both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted NEF RAW If NEF RAW is selected for Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 and image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pre
208. ll be raised and the view through the lens will E be displayed in the camera monitor instead of the viewfinder for improved focus pause briefly with the shutter release button pressed halfway before pressing it the rest of the way down To exit without taking a picture rotate the release mode dial to another setting or press MENU g Assigning Live View Mode to a Button If Live view is selected for Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 and a mode dial is set to mode other than or Mup the Fn button can be used to turn live view mode on and off This allows the self timer to be used in live view mode Note that the camera will use the release mode selected with the release mode dial pg 84 rather than the mode selected in the Release mode menu If desired this function can also be assigned to the depth of field preview button pg 324 or the AE L AF L button pg 325 93 3 Framea picture in the monitor To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 x press the amp button Q button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll within the AF area brackets 4 Focus Autofocus focus mode S or C Press the shutter release button halfway or press the AF ON button The camera will focus normally and set exposure Note that the mirror will click b
209. ll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture in full screen press amp button To select the current picture for printing press the O n button and press A The picture will be marked with a icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the On button pressed press A or Y to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Press when all the desired pictures have been selected to exit to the playback menu without changing the print order press MENU 253 254 3 Select imprint options is Print set DPOF D Select set Highlight the following options and press gt to toggle the highlighted ma option on or off to complete the print ER C Imori date order without including this information proceed to Step 4 e Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 4 Complete the print order Highlight Done and press to complete the print order O Data imprint C Imprint date 1 Print Set To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order pg 249 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printin
210. lso For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector see Custom Setting f2 Multi selector center button pg 318 233 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Use Description Press amp to zoom in to maximum of approximately Zoom in or Q QE 27 x large out images 20 x medium images or 13 x small images Press amp to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor View other Keep multi selector pressed to scroll areas of rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation image window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border a View other Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images at current zoom mages ratio Change protect Om See page 235 for more information status Return to Monitor will turn off Photographs can be shooting P taken immediately mode Display MENU See page 259 for more information menus 234 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame zoom and thumbnail playback the O n button can be used to protect pho
211. lso See page 418 for a list of default settings 197 198 Multiple Exposure Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and produce results with colors noticeably better than photographs combined in an imaging application because they make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s 1 Select Multiple exposure SHOOTINGMENU e Active Dighting OFF 7 Highlight Multiple exposure Dicer oF in the shooting menu and AR ei E u a press CET oF E interval timer shooting OFF 2 Select Number of shots GG Multiple exposure a Highlight Number of shots Beis and press D gt E l Number of shots 2 Auto gain ON Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review pg 265 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay for image review using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay pg 297 The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 3 Select the number of shots Press A or W to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press 4 select Auto gain E Mu
212. lt a ca Low battery Ready a fully charged 46 spare battery e Battery exhausted Recharge or replace battery e Battery can notbe Contact Nikon used authorized service representative e An extremely e Replace the battery A a exhausted or recharge the xxiii 32 blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery if the 34 battery or a third rechargeable Li ion party battery is battery is exhausted inserted either in the camera or in the optional MB D10 battery pack 409 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page Camera clock is not set Set camera clock 38 blinks No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying Aperture value will be AF maximum aperture displayed if maximum 210 Aperture shown in aperture is specified stops from maximum aperture gt lt Camera unable to focus f Focus manually 81 blinks using autofocus e Use a lower ISO 106 sensitivity e In exposure mode p Subject too bright T e ND 337 Hi photo will be overexposed 5 Increase shutter 118 speed A Choose a smaller 119 aperture larger f number 410 Indicator Control View panel finder Problem Solution Page e Use a higher ISO 106 sensitivity e In exposure mode Subject too dark photo P Use flash 185 oe will be underexposed Lower shutter 118 speed A Choose a larger 119 aperture smaller
213. m settings all banks All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings 344 Menu Option Setup Clean image sensor Video mode HDMI World time excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Image authentication Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data My Menu Recent Settings All My Menu items All recent settings Choose tab Settings saved using the D700 can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP4 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed Settings saved using the D700 can not be used in other cameras 345 346 GPS Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit pg 213 Virtual Horizon Display a virtual horizon based on i Virtual horizon information from the camera orientation sensor The virtual horizon is displayed in green when the camera is level m Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back If the camera is unable to measure the tilt angle the virtual horizon display will turn off See Also For information on using the electronic analog expos
214. memory card 1 Turn the camera off Power switch ZA i O OUE A ae f ll Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card Insert the memory card with the front label toward the monitor D When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button will pop up and the green access lamp will light briefly Front Access lamp 1 Inserting Memory Cards Direction of insertion Insert the memory card terminals first Inserting the card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure that the card is in the correct e orientation Terminals Front 41 4 Close the card slot cover Close and latch the card slot cover r EE Removing Memory Cards 1 Turn the camera off Confirm that the access lamp is off and turn the camera off 2 Remove the memory card Open the memory card slot cover and press the eject button to partially eject the card The memory card can then be removed by hand Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card 42 Formatting Memory Cards Memory cards must be formatted before first use Forma
215. mes can be up to 36 characters long e Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 270 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long e Attach copyright information Select this PEET option to attach copyright informationto i all subsequent photographs Attach Tesoro copyright information can be turned on i and off by highlighting it and pressing Meck m Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright Information option 343 Save Load Settings Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card if the card is full an error will be displayed see pg 412 Menu Option Playback Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall Shooting all banks Shooting menu bank File naming Image quality Image size Image area JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Color space Active D Lighting Vignette control Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Live view Custo
216. mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL3e batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 437 Index Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold Symbols amp Switch 318 Single point AF 74 75 Dynamic area AF 74 75 285 Auto area AF 74 75 S 84 CL 84 86 91 299 CH 84 86 89 Self timer 102 Mup 104 amp 3 Matrix 112 113 295 2 Center weighted 112 294 295 CJ Spot 112 295 P Programmed auto 116 5 Shutter priority auto 118 A Aperture priority auto 119 M Manual 121 Help 26 31 r Memory buffer 53 PRE Preset manual 141 148 Numerics 1 005 segment RGB sensor 140 3D color matrix metering Il 113 3D tracking 74 75 286 A AC adapter 385 Accessories 385 Active D Lighting 179 Active folder 272 AE L 79 126 325 AF 72 74 76 80 AF activation 287 AF area brackets 45 94 AF assist 53 290 375 AF fine tune 347 AF point illumination 288 AF point selection 289 AF area mode 74 auto area AF 74 75 dynamic area AF 74 75 285 single point AF 74 75 438 AF C priority selection 283 AF 0N button 73 96 287 291 AF On for MB D10 291 AF S priority selection 284 After delete 265 A M switc
217. n To return to the shooting menu without changing the bank name press the MENU button Bank names can be up to twenty characters long Any characters after the twentieth will be deleted Save changes and exit we After editing the name press to save changes and exit O Nikon button The Shooting menu bank menu will E Shooting menu bank be displayed Reset Shooting Menu Choose whether to restore default settings for the current shooting menu bank See page 419 for a list of default settings With the exceptions of image quality image size white balance and ISO sensitivity shooting menu settings are not reset when a two button reset pg 196 is performed Option Description Yes Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank No default Exit without changing shooting menu settings 271 272 Active Folder Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored BE New Folder Number 1 Select New folder number E Active folder E New folder number Highlight New folder number i and press gt 7 Choose a folder number Press lt or P to highlight a digit press A or W to change Ifa folder with the selected number already exists a D or icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e Folder is empty e Folder is partially full e Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No fu
218. n contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Note that disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred Data already recorded to the card will not be affected BE Shooting Problem Solution Page Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is full or not inserted e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f9 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture e Exposure mode S selected with bust ty selected for shutter speed 41 47 327 118 Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to or C e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock e Shutter release button can not be used to focus when Tripod is selected in live view mode Use the AF ON button to focus 72 78 81 96 403 404 Problem Solution Page Flash in use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using NA E P optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or 305 P SB R200 Speedlight choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds Focus docs no
219. n 30s 3a and s 000s aaa Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects high shutter speeds to freeze motion i Fast shutter speed 1 600 s Slow shutter speed 6 s 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot See Also See page 411 for information on what to do if flashing tis tt indicator appears in the shutter speed displays 118 Ai Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Select exposure MODE button mode ZN Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder and control Main command dial panel 2 Choose an aperture While the exposure meters are active rotate the sub command dial to z choose aperture from Sub command dial values between the minimum and maximum for the lens Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field pg 115 bringing both foreground and background into focus Large apertures low f numbers soften background details in portraits or other compositions that emphasize the main subject Small aperture f 32 Large aperture f 2 8 119 120 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses pg 372 If the maximum aperture of the
220. n and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle o t H amp g 1 USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 4 Turn the camera on Power switch 5 Transfer photographs Nikon Transfer will start automatically click the Start Transfer button to transfer photographs for more information on using Nikon Transfer select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help menu Start Transfer button 6 Turn the camera off Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete vV During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress 241 242 Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter pg 385 is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Transfer mode Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before select
221. n error occurs during printing 251 252 BE Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures pg 249 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print 7 PictBrie Highlight Index print in the Print select PictBridge menu pg 249 and K gt Print DPOF press gt OY The confirmation dialog shown at right Index print will be displayed bfi E m Print 2 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 3 Adjust printing options ET Choose page size border and time mi stamp options as described on page 251 a warning will be displayed if the ta selected page size is too small 4 start printing Highlight Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press EHE Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF Selecting Print set DPOF from the playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1 1 Choose Select set i Print set DPOF Highlight Select set and press gt qed Y Select set gt ba Deselect all 9 vy 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scro
222. n error occurs during printing Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 245 2 Choose Print select or Print PictBridge DPOF Print select n Highlight one of the following Print DPOF options and press gt a index orn e Print select Select pictures for printing e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu pg 253 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 252 for more information 249 250 3 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures on the memory card To display the current picture full screen press amp button To select the current picture for printing press the O n button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the O n button va Print DPOF Fin Rn pressed press A or W to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected 4 Display printing options Press to display PictBridge printing options 5000 button A Setup
223. nal is not in use The following accessories can be used all lengths are approximate Accessory Description Length Remote shutter release with blue yellow Remote Cord and black terminals for connection to a 1m MC 22 remote shutter triggering device allowing 3 ft 3 in control via sound or electronic signals Remote Cord Remote shutter release can be used to 30 cm MC 30 reduce camera shake or keep the shutter 2 ft 7 in open during a time exposure Remote shutter release can be used for interval timer photography or to reduce R camera shake or keep the shutter open emote Cord 85cm MC 36 during a time exposure Equipped with 2 ft 9 in back lit control panel shutter release lock for use in bulb photography and timer that beeps at one second intervals Extersi n Cord Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 Sm MC 21 22 23 25 30 or 36 Only one MC 21 can 9 ft 10 in be used at a time Connecting Cord Connects two cameras for simultaneous 40 cm MC 23 operation 1 ft 4 in Ten pin to two pin adapter cord for Adapter Cord connection to devices with two pin 20 cm MC 25 terminals including the MW 2 radio 8 in control set MT 2 intervalometer and ML 2 modulite control set GPS Adapter Cord ced by manufacturer of GPS device SSM MC 35 aera 14 in pg 213 Modulite Remote Control Set ML 3 Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8 m 26 ft 389 BE Approved Memory Card
224. nd other low contrast subjects Brightness Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced brightness Does not affect exposure Saturation Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it Hue Ajuo woypouow uou s u wuzsnfpe jenuew Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and blues more purple Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose from Off the default setting yellow orange red and green pg 167 Toning Ajuo wopouow syuawjsn pe jenuew Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black and white the default setting Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple pg 167 165 M Active D Lighting Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D Lighting pg 179 is on Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost when Active D Lighting is turned on M A Auto Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type Gor D lens for best results The icons for
225. nd setup options MENU button can be accessed from the camera menus E To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Choose from playback shooting Slider shows position in current Custom Settings setup retouch menu and My menus see following page CD brightness lean image sensor ock mirror up for cleaning ideo mode Current settings are shown by 9 Menu options If 2 icon is displayed help for options in current menu current item can be viewed by pressing Om button pg 31 26 BE Menus The following menus are available Menu Description Playback Adjust playback settings and manage photos pg 260 G Shooting Adjust shooting settings pg 268 Custom Settings Personalize camera settings pg 280 Format memory cards and perform basic camera Y Setup setup pg 331 Create retouched copies of existing photographs Ki Retouch pg 349 Create a menu of custom options pg 364 If My Menu desired a menu of recently used settings can be displayed in place of My Menu pg 368 27 28 Using Camera Menus BE Menu Controls The multi selector and button are used to navigate the menus Multi selector Select highlighted item Select highlighted item or display sub menu Move cursor up Cancel and return to previous menu gt Move cursor down
226. nd the release mode that Pf ive view mode will be used while the camera is in live view PEPPEN mode The following live view modes are available Option Description Choose when taking hand held shots of moving aA Hand held subjects or when framing photographs at angles that default make it difficult to use the viewfinder pg 93 Camera focuses normally using phase detection autofocus Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod View can be enlarged in monitor for precise focus making this mode suitable for static subjects pg 96 Autofocus 2 Tripod can be used to compose photographs with subject positioned at any point in the frame without recomposing photograph Camera focuses using contrast detect autofocus Phase Detection Versus Contrast Detect AF The camera normally uses phase detection autofocus in which focus is adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor When Tripod is selected in live view however the camera uses contrast detect autofocus in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast Contrast detect autofocus takes longer than phase detection autofocus Release mode can be chosen from the following options Option Description S Single frame Camera takes one photograph each time shutter default release button is pressed CL Sane While shutter release button is held down camera ow speed
227. nel display No of shots Bracketing order EVs me na Seinen cna T 0 0 JF 0J tereit 3 0 3 0 0 7 ae daa ane bean 3 0 3 0 7 0 Ht eP AF tee poene 2 0 0 3 er no We teens ene qoen 2 0 0 3 JF gx Porsrrscrs fcc 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 E na Bina sao ee Ta puseniea a 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 FU E T P C PE iF on iiiliii 7 0 7 1 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 AD a calcd s FF DA Vonat 3 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 See Also For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 292 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e7 Bracketing order pg 317 4 Framea photograph focus and 7 shoot i The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation see page 128 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot No shots 3 Display after first Increment 0 7 shot Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment OEV 1 EV 1 EV 133 134 BE Canceling Bracketing To cancel bracketing press the Fn butt
228. nformation display Shooting data pages including camera name Data metering exposure focal length white balance and image options appear in photo information display Image Review Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting Option Description On Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting Off default Pictures can only be displayed by pressing P button After Delete Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description default Show next Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previous picture will be displayed Show lV Display previous picture If deleted picture was first previous frame following picture will be displayed before Continueas If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Rotate Tall Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures for display during playback Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review pg 219 Option Description Tall portrait orientation pict
229. ng info display pg 301 PWN wu 123 l SE EEEEOEE 20 A FA A UE Se 9 19 45 fos tata 1 8 8 N i 10 17 _ AUTO Ec RAW i ase ao SDO 15 1 16 TEAUTO Bar SHOOT PAN SONRA E PE CUSTOMPAN KOAN BS SAE AE Fo as 3 4 1 114 10 Camera battery indicator 46 Flexible program indicator 117 11 MB D10 battery type Exposure MOCE seeeccsseeceeseees Shutter speed lock icon 326 Shutter speed 118 121 Exposure compensation VAUS on cosssesscccsseseccesssesencenseecceenee 128 Flash compensation value 190 Number of shots in bracketing SCQUCIICE cssescsssccssrssenesees 131 135 Focal length NON CPU lenses wees 212 Color temperature e 147 Color temperature TAGI CATON aeeessesssseccsccssssesesensesecs 147 Aperture stop indicator 120 373 Aperture lock icon sseee 326 Aperture f number 119 121 Aperture number of stops 120 373 Bracketing increment 132 136 Maximum aperture NON CPU lenses 212 Electronic analog exposure 0k eer 123 Exposure compensation 128 Bracketing progress indicator 131 135 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 display MB D10 battery indicator 303 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 EXPOSULES nc sesesccssecsseccssescneeeessecnee 47 Number of exposures remaining Manual lens number Auto area AF indicator Focus po
230. ngs other than Custom Setting d4 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Average frame rate with an EN EL3e battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 1 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting Release mode dial lock release Release mode dial m 85 p 86 Continuous Mode To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and Ct continuous low speed modes Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL 1 Select CH or Ct mode Was WZ Se AA Release mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at up to 5 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 299 in continuous low speed mode Power Source and Frame Rate The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source used Power source Max frame advance rate EN EL3e battery or MB D10 battery pack 5 fps with EN EL3e battery MB D10 battery pack with EN EL4a battery 8 fps3 or AA size batteries AC adapter 1 Average fram
231. nses that block the subject s view of the AF assist illuminator may interfere with red eye reduction M AF Assist Illumination The AF assist illuminator can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 24 200 mm AF assist illumination is not available with the following lenses AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED e AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED At ranges under 0 7m 2ft 4in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF Micro 200mm f 4D ED e AF S DX 17 55mm f 2 8G ED e AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED e AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED e AF Micro 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED e AF S 28 70mm f 2 8D ED e AF S 17 35mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 1 1m 3ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S DX VR 55 200mm f 4 5 6G ED At ranges under 1 5m 4ft 11in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED e AF S VR 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6G ED e AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED e AF 80 200mm f 2 8D ED At ranges under 2 3m 7ft 7in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor e AF VR 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED 375 376 Calculating Picture Angle The D700 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm 135 format cameras If Auto DX crop is on t
232. nspection Do not disassemble Touching the product s internal parts could result in injury In the event of malfunction the product should be repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection A Donot use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire A Keep out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury A Donot place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation A Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards e Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or stor
233. nt Fluorescent Direct sunlight Flash a Cloudy t Shade 9 Choose color temp fl PRE Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector E White balance Wie a d nya j d 4 Copy d 0 to the selected preset Highlight Copy d 0 and press If comment has been created for d 0 pg 158 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset E White balance E Preset manual Set Edit comment Select image Copy 0 153 154 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the memory card to a selected preset d 1 d 4 only Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu pg 140 and press gt ty White balance O Incandescent Fluorescent Direct sunlight P Flash T a Cloudy E e Shade 4 Choose color temp fl PRE 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 and press the center of the multi selector iy White balance F ee FR 4 0 2 Y e RA d3 d4 2 PRE Select Oset 3 Choose Select image Highlight Select image and press gt White balance E Preset manual d1 Set Edit comment Select image Copy dO 4 Highlight a sour
234. nt by processing images according to the color of the light source This is known as white balance This chapter covers white balance settings White Balance Options sscscscescessscecessecsscececees pg 140 Fine Tuning White Balance cssssssssssssesesseeseers pg 143 Choosing a Color Temperature cscsccsscsecscsceeces pg 147 Presets Manua ea A E A AAT pg 148 139 140 White Balance Options For natural coloration choose a white balance setting that matches the light source before shooting The following options are available Color temp Option K Description White balance is adjusted automatically using color temperature measured by image mute 3 500 sensor and 1 005 segment RGB AUTO default 8 000 Sensor For best results use type G f or D lens If built in or optional flash is used white balance reflects conditions in effect when the flash goes off z Incandescent 3 000 Use under incandescent lighting 3 Fluorescent Use under following seven light sources Sodium vapor lamps 2 700 Use under sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues Warm white Use under warm white fluorescent 3 000 fluorescent lights White fluorescent 3 700 Use under white fluorescent lights Cool white fluorescent 4 200 Use under cool white fluorescent lights Day white fluorescent 5 000 Use nder daylight white fluorescent lights Daylight fluores
235. ntil the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose positive values to make the main subject brighter negative values to make it darker Sub command dial At values other than 0 a icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the button The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the button 25 56 22 aa 0 EV E button Normal flash output can be restored by pressed setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not reset when the camera ies s5 CL is turned off 0 3 EV Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available when setting flash compensation see Custom Setting b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 292 191 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button GS 5 Assion FUNC button Select FV lock for Custom Setting f5 7 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button En Fae AE lock Reset on release press pg 32
236. o FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 305 8 CPU lens required 380 Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Speedlight SB 80DX SB 30 SB 27 SB 28DX cp copy 58225 5822 eee SB 28 SB 26 SB 20 rae Flash mode SB 25 SB 24 SB 16B SB 15 A Non TTL auto Vv Vv M Manual Y Yv Vv Vv ma Repeating flash Vv REAR Rear curtain sync Y Vv Vv Vv 1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 2 Autofocus is only available with AF Micro lenses 60 mm 105 mm or 200 mm 381 382 1 Notes on Optional Speedlights Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the Speedlight supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D700 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed The
237. ol ou eeessssseseceeeeee 162 6 QUICK adjust A ceeseeesesccceeeennsees 165 Original Picture Control 3 162 WHITE BALANCE AUTO 0 0 sRGB STANDARD 7 SHAarPening eesesssesecsccssseesscenees 165 8 CONTIAST sccessessesseseescessssrsseessoee 165 9 BrightNneSS ssssssssssessssesssessssersse 165 10 Saturation 4 165 Filter effects gt sesser 165 M HUE A on csssssecnsssconssssessessesssssenavscense 165 TONING sssctcerscdsawvsabesccssaccspveanteceet 165 12 Camera name 13 Folder number frame number 272 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode pg 264 Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls Monochrome Picture Controls only Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format 24 x 16 selected for the Image area option in the shooting menu BE Shooting Data Page 3 3 NOISE REDUC 4 ACT D LIGHT 5 6 7 1 Protect Status 235 2 Retouch indicator 349 3 High ISO noise reduction 278 Long exposure noise FECUCTION seecccssccssesecrsseesesneenee 277 4 Active D Lighting sss 179 HI 1S0 NORM A NORMAL NORMAL D LIGHT ING WARM TONE CYANOTYPE RIM T SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 5 Vignette control esses 276 6 Retouch history ss ssssssssssssssssse 349 7 IMAGE COMMENE esssseescseeseee 335 8 Camera name 9 Folder
238. olor balance The JPEG copy will have an image quality of fine and a size of L 358 Image Overlay Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than overlays created in imaging applications The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size pp 64 69 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay E Image overlay Image 1 Image2 Preview Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu and press Cary The dialog shown at right will 0 OF be displayed with Image 1 g highlighted amp Zo0m OW Select 2 Display NEF RAW images E mase overlay Image 1 Press A picture selection dialog will be displayed 3 Highlight a photograph py image overlay Image 1 Press AW 4 lt or P to highlight the first photograph in the u ma i pa overlay To view the A i highlighted photograph full frame press and hold the amp button Hidden images are not displayed and can not be selected 359 360 4 Select the highlighted ue photograph Image 1 Image2 Preview Press to select the highlighted photograph and l return to the preview display ea eee The selected im
239. om the next slide or Exit to return pope to the playback menu 266 Print Set DPOF Choose Select set to select pictures for printing on a DPOF compatible device pg 253 Choose Deselect all to remove all pictures from the current print order 267 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options The shooting menu contains the options listed below To display the shooting menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the shooting menu tab for more information see page 26 Shooting menu bank 269 Reset shooting menu 271 Active folder 272 File naming 274 Image quality 64 Image size 69 Image area 58 JPEG compression 67 NEF RAW recording 67 White balance 140 Set Picture Control 160 Manage Picture Control 168 Color space 181 Active D Lighting 180 Vignette control 276 Long exp NR 277 High ISO NR 278 ISO sensitivity settings 106 Live view 90 Multiple exposure 198 Interval timer shooting 203 268 Shooting Menu Bank Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks With the exceptions of Multiple exposure Interval timer shooting and modifications to Picture Controls quick adjust and other manual adjustments changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings
240. on Transfer can also be used to back up photographs and embed information in photographs as they are transferred while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs convert images to different file formats and perform simple editing on NEF RAW photographs To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter available separately BE Supported Operating Systems The camera can be connected to computers running the following operating systems e Windows Windows Vista Service Pack 1 32 bit Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate and Windows XP Service Pack 2 Home Edition Professional e Macintosh Mac OS X version 10 3 9 10 4 11 or 10 5 2 See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on supported operating systems vV Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 available separately pg 388 can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is running F will be displayed in the control panel 239 240 Direct USB Connection Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off Power switch 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer o
241. on and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero GF and m is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset pg 196 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated Exposure and Flash Bracketing In single frame and self timer modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture programmed auto aperture shutter priority auto or shutter speed aperture priority auto manual exposure mode When On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt
242. ooting Speed d5 Max Continuous Release E d6 File Number Sequence sessssssssssosssssessssssssssssssssesee 300 d7 Shooting Info Display esscsssssscssseccssessecneecesseeeeenseees 8 LCD WIUMINAtION seie a d9 Exposure Delay MOde ssscssscssssseccsssecesseecesnsecesneeees d10 MB D10 Battery Type i d11 Battery Order sssssssssssssesssssseeesssssseressssoereeesseereesssserees e Bracketing Flash ssssssssssessssesssseesssseessseessseeessseeesseesssseessseesssse e1 Flash Sync Speed ssssseesssssseessssserressssereeessssereesssesreesse e2 Flash Shutter Speed ss ssssssssssssssssssoesscososssssssssssosrreeee e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash e4 Modeling Flash e5 Auto Bracketing Set is e6 Auto Bracketing Mode M ssssssssssscsssessecseecesseecenseees e7 Bracketing OFder ssscsssesscseseccssescssntecssseeecenecssneesenseees TEGOMEIONS 5 RA N A Ns fe Swit nea nr a RA NA RE f2 Multi Selector Center Button f3 Multi Selector sssssssssssssesssssss f4 Photo Info Playback oF f5 Assign FUNC Button eccssesscssseccssscccnsecessseecessecessneeees f6 Assign Preview BUttON ssscssssecsssescccstecesseeecesneeessneeees f7 Assign AE L AF L Button 000 f8 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock f9 Customize Command Dials ie 10 Release Button to Use Dial sessssssscsssssccseeeseeneeees 11 NO Memory Card ee
243. or continuous high speed Ch release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Remember that the camera will focus before each shot no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF Before choosing a starting time select World time in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date pg 38 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 203 3 Choose a start time BB interval timer shooting E Start time Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes press A or W to change The starting time is Soir not displayed if Now is Kl GMove selected for Choose start time 204 Choose an interval Interval timer shooting O Olnterval Press lt or gt to highlight hours minutes or seconds press A or W to change Note 001 x 1 0001 that the camera will not be A GMove set able to take photographs at the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or the time required to record images 5 Choose the number of intervals and number of shots per interval DOE x 2 0006 gt Press 4 or P to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or W to change The total number of 003
244. or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure Live view pg 89 can not be used to record multiple exposures The information listed in the playback photo information display including date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and the following can not be changed bracketing and shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer shooting note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before the first exposure is taken The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off ref photo options in the setup menu can not used 201 202
245. orage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away 399 400 Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unatten
246. ority in continuous servo AF To select continuous servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to C Focus mode selector Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release default button is pressed _ Release Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in Es focus In continuous mode frame rate slows for improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast Es Focus is displayed Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when the in focus indicator is displayed 283 284 a2 AF S Priority Selection This option controls whether Focus mode selector photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority in single servo AF To select single servo AF rotate the focus mode selector to S Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Eng Focus default Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will lock while the in focus indicator is displayed a3 Dynamic AF Area If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic area AF t pg 74 is se
247. other special filter is used e The subject appears smaller than the focus point e The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g windows in a skyscraper e The subject is moving Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters The Shooting Information Display To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode press the M button Shooting information on Shooting information off g m P 5 56 gds P 15 F56 200591 Virtual horizon Framing guides not displayed during zoom not displayed during zoom AF area brackets are displayed only in hand held mode Hand held Tripod 99 p 100 m Shooting in Live View Mode Although they will not appear in the final picture banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned Bright spots may also appear When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed Metering can not be
248. ow before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Refer to the page numbers in the right most column for more information EE Display Problem Solution Page Adjust viewfinder focus or use 45 optional diopter adjustment lenses Viewfinder is out of focus Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery 46 Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay 296 297 or c4 Monitor off delay Displays turn off without warning Unusual characters See A Note on Electronically displayed in control panel Controlled Cameras below 402 Displays in control panel The response times and brightness or viewfinder are of these displays varies with unresponsive and dim temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again In the event of continued malfunctio
249. owing bit depth options for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit default 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits 14bit 14 bit producing files larger than 12 bit files but increasing the color data recorded NEF RAW Images Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images When opened in software such as Capture NX 2 available separately or ViewNX supplied NEF RAW images have the dimensions given for large L size images Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from Large the default option Medium or Small note that image size varies depending on the option selected for Image area pg 58 Image area Option Size pixels Print size cm in L 4 256 x 2 832 54 1 x 36 0 21 3x 14 2 oy M 3 184x 2 120 40 4 x 26 9 15 9 x 20 6 S 2 128x1 416 27 0 x 18 0 10 6 x 7 1 L 2 784 x 1 848 354x 23 5 13 9x 9 2 A e M 2 080 x 1 384 264x 17 6 10 4x69 S 1 392x920 17 7 x11 7 7 0x 4 6 Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Print size decreases as printer resolution increases 69 Image size can be set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired option is d
250. pee when B amp W black and white is selected a Filter effects Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 167 168 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture SHOOTING MENU e NEF RAW recording Control White balance Set Picture Control In the shooting menu pg 268 pe IS highlight Manage Picture eS Control and press gt 2 Select Save edit iy Manage Picture a Highlight Save edit and press gt Load save 3 Select a Picture Control g Choose Picture C Highlight an existing Picture E x Control and press or press H ZC Monochrome to proceed to step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification 4 Edit the selected Picture Control Sharpening E Contrast See page 165 for more Brightness E Saturation information To abandon any IET changes and start over press SBc XX the button Press when settings are complete 5 Select a destination E Manase Picture Contra PEL Choose a destination for the B02 Used E ESC3 Unused 4 custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt ESC6 Unused E307 Unused 169 170 6 Name the Picture Ba Rename Control Keyboa
251. pensation settings selected using the 4 button are not reset As above except that the exposure compensation On value selected using the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off Off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the default button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub The dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f9 Customize command dials gt Change main sub pg 326 Customize command dials gt Change main sub Off default On m F Sub command dial Sub command dial 2 3 5 Sub command dial Main command dial 2 2R Main command dial Sub command dial Sn N A 293 294 b5 Center Weighted Area When calculating exposure center Option weighted metering assigns the greatest 8 8mm weight to a circle in the center of the frame 12 bp 12 mm default The diameter of this circle can be setto 915 615mm 8 12 15 or 20 mm or to the average of the 20 620mm entire frame OAvg Average Note that unless Average is selected the diameter is fixed at 12 mm when a non CPU lens is used regardless of the setting selected for Non CPU lens data in the setup menu pg 210 When Average is selected the average of the entire frame will be used for both CPU and non
252. photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon Speedlights Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information 383 Flash Contacts The D700 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable BE The Accessory Shoe Use the accessory shoe to mount optional flash units directly on the camera without a sync cable pg 378 The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 and SB 400 BE The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe
253. r as the background The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Example subject is inside a cage The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns Example a row of windows in a skyscraper The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example subject is half in the shade Background objects appear larger than the subject Example a building is in the frame behind the subject The subject contains many fine details Example a field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack variation in brightness Manual Focus Manual focus is available for Focus mode lenses that do not support selector autofocus non AF Nikkor lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results pg 80 To focus manually set the focus mode selector to Mand adjust the lens focusing ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus l iam i lin A M Selection Autofocus with Manual Priority If the lens supports A M selection set the lens A M switch to M manual If the lens supports M A autofocus with manual priority focus can be adjusted manually regardless of the mode selected with the lens See the documentation provided with your lens for details 81 82 The Electron
254. r be cleaned only by Nikon authorized service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter If the battery level is below 60 turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL3e battery or connect an optional EH 5a or EH 5 AC adapter 2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning fam Remove the lens and turn the camera on Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press note that this option is not available at battery i levels of 24 or below 3 Press iy Lock mirror up for cleaning The message shown at right will be When shutter release button is displayed in the monitor and a row of iy creased the wor said Simm To lower mirror turn camera off dashes will appear in the control panel and viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off eg E 395 4 Raise the mirror Press the shutter release button all the way down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter The display in the viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink 5 Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 7 6 Cl
255. raphy can be paused by e Pressing the amp button between intervals e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be replaced while the camera is off e Selecting live view self timer or mirror up MupP release modes To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting GS terval timer shooting trigger E Choose start time C 4 Start time _ Choose a new starting trigger and start time as described on page 203 2 Resume shooting BB Interval timer shooting O Start Foti Highlight Start gt Restart and ie press 9 Note that if interval timer photography was paused during shooting any shots remaining in the current interval will be canceled 207 208 EE nterrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset pg 196 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu pg 271 e Changing bracketing settings pg 130 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends EE No Photograph Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet to be taken the memory buffer or memory card is full or the camera is unable to focus in single servo AF note that the camera focuse
256. rd The text entry dialog shown area at right will be displayed By default new Picture meani Oit O Controls are named by adding a two digit number assigned automatically to the name of the existing Picture Control This name can be edited to create a new name as described below Name area To move the cursor in the name area press the 9 button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the multi selector To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 1 button Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters long Any characters after the 19th will be deleted After entering the name press The Set Picture Control new Picture Control will appear in the oe Picture Control list y ENI Vivid ESC Monochrome ie es01 VIVID 02 OH C Grid CAdiust Custom Picture Controls canbe renamed Erm at any time using the Rename optionin W the Manage Picture Control menu are Delete Load save Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu pg 271 Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option pg 165 Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls The Original Picture Control Icon The Nikon Picture Control on which the cu
257. required Eyepiece Adapter DK 18 The DK 18 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier or DR 3 right angle viewing attachment to the D700 Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK 14 DK 17A These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions The DK 17A is equipped with a safety lock Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK 19 The DK 19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see preventing eye fatigue Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 5 DR 4 The DR 5 and DR 4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting position The DR 5 can also magnify the view through the viewfinder by 2 x for greater precision when framing note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when the view is magnified Filters e Nikon filters can be divided into three types screw in slip in and rear interchange Use Nikon filters filters manufactured by other makers may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding e The D700 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL circular polarizing filter instead e The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens e To prevent moir use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame e Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over
258. reset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed w PRE WB button Sub command Control panel dial 157 EH Entering a Comment Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual E White balance O Incandescent Highlight Preset manual in the he white balance menu pg 140 He and press P T Chose clr tno E PRE 2 Selecta preset E White balance a Highlight the desired preset iP FE and press the center of the ir 3 ya multi selector i 3 Select Edit comment E White balance E Preset manual Highlight Edit comment and E press A y Select image Copy dO 4 Edit the comment E White balance a Sh8 Edit the comment as described on page ST aR CRECGHI GEL 270 UNOPORSTUVWXYZ 158 Image Enhancement This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue using Picture Controls how to preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D Lighting and how to choose a color space PIGEUEECONUONS csrecceccrssvercecsees varcevaves eececaresvarsecavssvercoese pg 160 Creating Custom Picture Controls 0 00 sesccssssscsssecssseeeenseeees pg 168 Active D Lighting eeaeee areren eteren Ee Arena
259. ring II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if user provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 8 12 15 or 20 mm circle in center of frame or weighting based on average of entire frame non CPU lenses use 12 mm circle or average of entire frame Spot Meters 4 mm circle about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and Al Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program P shutter priority auto 5 aperture priority auto A manual M Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 3 2 or 1 EV Exposure bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV Flash bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 3 1 2 2 3 or 1 EV White balance bracketing 2 9 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button Exposure ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index ISO 200 6400 in steps of 3 1 2 or 1 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 or 1 EV ISO 100 equivalent below ISO 200 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 EV or 2 EV ISO 25600 equivalent above ISO 6400 Active D Lighting
260. rmatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted using the m t and MODE buttons pg 43 LCD Brightness Press A or W to choose from seven settings Pome for monitor brightness Choose higher values for increased brightness lower values for reduced brightness Clean Image Sensor Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to choose options for automatic image sensor cleaning pg 392 Lock Mirror up for Cleaning Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual cleaning of the low pass filter that protects the camera image sensor pg 395 Video Mode When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL HDMI The camera is equipped with an HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface mini pin connector allowing pictures to be played back on high definition televisions or monitors using a type C cable available separately from commercial suppliers Before connecting the camera to high definition device choose the HDMI format from the options below Option Description AUTO Auto default The camera automatically selects the appropriate format 480P 480p progressive 640 x 480 progressive format 576P 576p progressive 720 x 576 progressive format 720P 720p progressive
261. rol Push the diopter adjustment control back in Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Corrective lenses available separately pg 386 can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter Before attaching a diopter adjustment viewfinder lens remove the DK 17 viewfinder eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to release the eyepiece lock T and then unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right 45 46 Basic Photography and Playback Turn the Camera On Before taking photographs turn the camera on and check the battery level and number of exposures remaining as described below 1 Turn the camera on Turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light Power switch 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder Icon Control panel Viewfinder Description um Battery fully charged am Cm Battery partially discharged Cal Low battery Prepare to charge batter or ready na ey 3 Ca cA Shutter release disabled Charge or blinks blinks exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter 3 Checkthe number of exposures remaining The exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at cu
262. rrent folder whichever is higher If a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 Off File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or a new memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs RESET Reset Same as for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 M File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d6 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card d7 Shooting Info Display At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display pg 12 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automa
263. rrent settings When this number reaches zero 3 will flash in the exposure count displays while the shutter speed displays will show a blinking F wit or Fuk Large Capacity Memory Cards When enough memory remains on the memory card to record a thousand or more pictures at current settings the number of exposures remaining will be shown in thousands rounded down to the nearest hundred e g if there is room for approximately 1 260 exposures the exposure count display will show 1 2 K 47 48 LCD IIluminators Holding the power switch in the 8 Power switch position activates the exposure meters and control panel backlights LCD illuminators allowing the display to be read in the dark After the power switch is released the illuminator will remain lit for six seconds at default settings while the camera exposure meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated to 8 again Auto Meter Off At default settings the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder pg 54 The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay pg 296 Camera Off Display If the camera is t
264. rther pictures can be stored in this folder folder will not be selected when button is pressed Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full HE Select Folder 1 Choose Select folder Gy Select folder Highlight Select folder and E y 102ND700 press gt a 103N0700 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder M Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Number of Folders Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of folders 273 274 File Naming Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in
265. s Option Description Select center RESET focus point default Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode selects the center focus point ea Highlight active Pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting mode highlights the active focus focus point A P point Pressing the center of the multi selector has Not used no effect when the camera is in shooting mode EE Playback Mode Selecting Playback mode displays the following options Option Description Thumbnail on off Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame and thumbnail playback default 7 In both full frame and thumbnail playback a View ae 3 PA histogram is displayed while the center of the multi histograms F selector is pressed Press the center of the multi selector to toggle between full frame or thumbnail playback and Zoom on _ playback zoom Choose the initial zoom setting from Q off Low magnification Medium magnification and High magnification The zoom display will center on the active focus point Pressing center of multi selector displays list of Choose folders Highlight folder and press to select folder folder for playback Folders displayed depend on option selected for Playback folder pg 263 f3 Multi Selector If Reset meter off delay is selected operating the multi selector when the exposure meters are off pg 48 will activate the
266. s The following Type CompactFlash memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D700 Extreme IV SDCFX4 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB i Extreme III SDCFX3 SanDisk Ultra Il SDCEH 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB Standard SDCFB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB Professional UDMA 300 x 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB k r 80 x 2 GB 1 GB 512 MB Lexar Media Platinum II 50x 4GB Professional 133 x WA 8 GB 4 GB 2 GB 1 GB Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer 390 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside Camera wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled body water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may c
267. s again before each shot Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cx continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 5 shots per second In single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d4 CL mode shooting speed pg 299 Using the Monitor Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks pg 269 If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting menu pg 271 interval timer settings will be reset as follows e Choose start time Now e Interval 00 01 00 e Number of intervals 1 e Number of shots 1 Start shooting Off 209 210 Non CPU Lenses By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using anon CPU lens If the focal length of the lens is known e Automatic power zoom can be used with SB 900 SB 800 and SB 600 Speedlights available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display When the maximum aperture of
268. s pg 179 GOLOMSP aCe vex seccesestess ex ensccascastoersek a EAAS EEEE SAA pg 181 159 Picture Controls Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings among compatible devices and software Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to instantly adjust image processing settings or make independent adjustments to sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue These settings can be saved under new names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for use in compatible software and software created Picture Controls can be loaded into the camera Any given set of Picture Controls will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support the Nikon Picture Control system 160 BE Using Picture Controls Picture Controls can be used as described below e Select Nikon Picture Controls pg 162 Select an existing Nikon Picture Control Modify existing Picture Controls pg 164 Modify an existing Picture Control to create a combination of sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue for a particular scene or effect e Create custom Picture Controls pg 168 Store modified Picture Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired e Share custom Picture Controls pg 172 Custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for use in View
269. s the options available in the camera menus gt l The Playback Menu Managing Images pg 260 O The Shooting Menu Shooting Option pg 268 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings ertettek sste eree eeraa taea a eeens pg 280 The Setup Menu Camera Setup ccsscssssssesseeee pg 331 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies eetere ataie aeien pg 349 My Menu Creating a Custom Menu ssessssossoscsces pg 364 259 260 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images The playback menu contains the options listed below To display the playback menu press MENU and press lt d to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or W to highlight the playback menu tab for more information see page 26 Option See page Delete 262 Playback folder 263 Hide image 263 Display mode 264 Image review 265 After delete 265 Rotate tall 265 Slide show 266 Print set DPOF 253 Selecting Multiple Pictures Follow the steps below to select multiple pictures for Delete pg 262 Hide image pg 263 or Print set DPOF pg 267 Multiple pictures can also be selected for direct printing pg 249 1 Display the menu Press the MENU button select the playback menu tab and select the desired item in the playback menu 2 Display thumbnails is Delete To select pictures from a list of thumbnails choose the CA P Selected Select se
270. se the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Times Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second Times The options available for Times are determined by flash output Output Options available for Times 1 4 2 1 8 2 5 1 16 2 10 1 32 2 10 15 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35 EE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu e 3 Flash cntrl for builtin flash shown at right Press lt or gt to highlight the iiiki z following options A or W to change Bf Built in flash Group A Group B Channel Move Option Description Built in Parr flash Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire but the AF assist illuminator lights The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group
271. seccseeseeneesss 32 Insert the Battery ssessccssscccssseccssesccssesesssseccssssecssuteessseesssneessaeees 34 Attach a Lenssen issit ii 36 Basic SOCUPD iascccsscscsassiessivsecs svvvssssexseonccesetsscavtensedaysasesaoncsunsciuissocatentes 38 Insert a Memory Card ssescssssssscssesscsseecssseeccseesssseeeessecessetecssseees 41 Formatting Memory Cards csssssssscsssscsssessecseccsssecsseesesneesssnees 43 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS ssssssssssssscccssesssseesssnseessnseccseesssnseesee 45 Basic Photography and Playback sesssssssscsssssccssseecsssseceseeesees 46 Deleting Unwanted Photographs ou sssscsssscccesteecnstecensneesseess 56 Image Recording Options 57 MAJE At CA iecsictsescactessssssccosstsscecssesnctsestsarasssrssesbezisazsoibessatocetdatboadeictbetve 58 image Quali esuada 64 MAJE S ZE sascsssiiscsssssssactesassccessacaaczabactncsassssactsssesatntssetacsssecuancasebaoateesouanta 69 Focus 71 FOCUS Mode nnie eines ARR 72 AF Area ModE snidani nnani aiia 74 Focus Point Selection eu ecscsessssssssesssssssssesssssssessssessssessessssssessseeses 76 FOCUS LOCK sccssisccsnsesccessecisssucessisecasutautstassecutes coins scenrapeaseiseshsvbav esasadooousete Manual Focus Release Mode 83 Choosing a Release Mode cseessssssssccssescessssecsssescesseeecuseescessesesnsecs 84 CONTINUOUS MOCE eccsecssecsseecsnsccsscsesstecsseccesecrsseecsncessuccesneeeseessseees 86 Framing Pictures in the Monitor Live V
272. sed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device ina carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Cleaning When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunc
273. set 2 Applies to all banks Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Applies to all banks Shooting ends when reset is performed 419 EE Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings pg 282 Option Default a1 AF C priority selection pg 283 Release a2 AF S priority selection pg 284 Focus a3 Dynamic AF area pg 285 9 points a4 Focus tracking with lock on pg 287 Normal a5 AF activation pg 287 Shutter AF ON a6 AF point illumination pg 288 Auto a7 Focus point wrap around pg 288 No wrap a8 AF point selection pg 289 51 points a9 Built in AF assist illuminator pg 290 On a10 AF ON for MB D10 pg 291 AF ON b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 292 1 3 step b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl pg 292 1 3 step b3 Exp comp fine tune pg 292 1 3 step b4 Easy exposure compensation pg 293 Off b5 Center weighted area pg 294 12mm Fine tune optimal exposure pg 294 b6 Matrix metering 0 Center weighted 0 Spot metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L pg 296 Off c2 Auto meter off delay pg 296 6s c3 Self timer delay pg 297 10s Monitor off delay pg 297 Playback 10s c4 Menus 20s Shooting info display 10s Image review 4s Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom setting bank option will be reset pg 282 Settings in all
274. shutdown Clean at startup amp shutdown MM Cleaning off n CE Option Description m The image sensor is automatically cleaned 0N Clean at startup a y each time the camera is turned on The image sensor is automatically cleaned aw Clean at F OFF during shutdown each time the camera is shutdown turned off on Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at F amp shutdown startup and at shutdown Cleaning off Sy Automatic image sensor cleaning off 8 default Me ag g v Image Sensor Cleaning The following interrupt image sensor cleaning raising the built in flash pressing the shutter release depth of field preview or AF ON button or using FV lock Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean P the image sensor manually pg 395 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 394 BE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor pg 392 option in the setup menu the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filte
275. ss the MENU button PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Hide image Display mode i After delete Rotate tall ed Slide show Note the following points e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway pg 54 Help If a icon is displayed at the bottom left o SHOOTING MENU i Active D ight corner of the monitor help can be ET i i L NR displayed by pressing the O n button A Y description of the currently selected option 1S0 sensitivity settings Live view or menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press A or W to scroll through the display O n button E Multiple exposure Record the specified number of shots as a single image If no operations are performed for 30 s shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from any photographs that have been taken 31 First Steps Charge the Battery The camera is powered by an EN EL3e rechargeable Li ion battery supplied The EN EL3e is not fully charged at shipment To maximize shooting time charge the battery in the supplied MH 18a quick charger before use About two and a quarter hours are
276. ssed RAW will be displayed in the control panel until the picture is taken To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again before taking the picture This function can also be assigned to the depth of field preview button pg 324 or the AE L AF L button pg 325 BE The JPEG Compression Menu The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the following options for JPEG images Option Description fo Images are compressed to produce relativel Size priority g o P pi y His uniform file size Quality varies with scene default recorded 4 Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu Type The NEF RAW recording gt Type item in the shooting menu offers the following compression options for NEF RAW images Option Description Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible ONE compressed algorithm reducing file size by about 20 40 default with no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non ON Compressed reversible algorithm reducing file size by about 40 55 with almost no effect on image quality NEF images are not compressed Recording time Uncompressed increases slightly 67 68 BE The NEF RAW Recording Menu NEF RAW Bit Depth The NEF RAW recording gt NEF RAW bit depth item in the shooting menu offers the foll
277. ssss 268 Shooting Menu Bank sescssssssscsssecssseecsssseccsneecesseeesseeeeaneees 269 Reset Shooting MENU ssecsssessccsseeccssescssseecssasecssneeesnsecesnees 271 xiii xiv Active Folderin i 272 File Na ming esscczcsscezcesssescinssestiernnpncestiasuacevevencnesensabarenancesoeaweetee gt 274 Image Quality issnin 274 Image Size 274 Image Area 274 JPEG Compression 275 NEF RAW Recording ssssecsssessccstecesssesccssccesssccssneeessnseeesase 275 White Balanrce escssssssesssccsssessecssseessecssneesssessnsecsssssnsessecssneeses 275 Set Picture CONTHOL sesscsseesseessseecsecssseesscesssessecssnessesessesecs 275 Manage Picture Control ssscssssscsssesscsssecessecccsseceesneecesnees 275 Color Space eecsssescceseeees Active D Lighting Vignette COntrol oun escssssscssescsssseccssecessueecssneeeeenseees z Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction 277 High ISO NR o E 278 ISO Sensitivity Settings 278 Live VieW s s s Multiple Exposure 278 Interval Timer SHOOTING 0 ssseessccsssesscccsssessecesseseceecenseseeensee 279 Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings 0 280 Custom Setting Bank ceeccsseesccsseecssseesceneeees Reset Custom Settings m AEAUTOTOCUS inina E E E AEAEE E i a1 AF C Priority Selection s sssessssssssesesssssseeressssseressssssree 283 a2 AF S Priority Selection ss s
278. ssssssscsesesecsssssesesessssesesees pg 391 SUOLAG Gia rcccaninecari nema mare eres pg 391 EENE r ene cece pg 391 The LowPass FIE eee aee cette neces pg 392 Pea ON A A E A pg 392 Clean at Startup Shutdown ssssssssssssssssssssssssssseessesssesssssse pg 393 Manual ENEE LE ar AS pg 395 Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions pg 398 MNOUDlESMOOCIIG ereire aeaea Ee Erie AET pg 402 ErrOniM SSAGES ccccccsccrccsecsestcecsoecncisssseatenssecsscsnscsesssaccesess pg 409 fa 0 XAL b Cerro tere ereterrr E eee eee err pg 417 LAEE OI E A A pg 428 369 370 Compatible Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended for use with the D700 CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring CPU contacts Aperture ring CPU lens l Type G lens Type D lens Compatible CPU Lenses Camera setting Focus mode Exposure Metering system mode Pn M PeR 2 c a S M 3D Color CJ Lens accessory rangefinder Type G or D AF Nikkor 3 AF S AF I Nikkor K ol Vial dl closes a PC E NIKKOR series v Yt tjt v3 PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D v Y vi y y AF S AF I Teleconverter v YV vivi v v Other AF Nikkor 9 9 3 except lenses for F3AF v Y a Nh ed Al P Nikkor vv ViVviv j iv v
279. ssssssscsssssccssesccsnteccssececensecssneeecceneees 329 12 Reverse Indicators 0 sessssssscssseesssstecesssccessecessseecssseeesaee The Setup Menu Camera Setup Format Memory Card A LCD Brightness ivssc sscsissssaciccossscssssssasssssceencessoserasasaiacondsennavesecaie Clean Image SQNSOL sssscsssseccsssscesseecesseccssseceesseesssseeessneeees Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning ssssccsssecssseesccsecesseseccsneeeeeee 332 Video Mode wasissessassciscovsecensssasssassasasasasecovasconsniniveassdiavaaioarsoassizien 333 HDMI World Time Language E Image COMMENE siisii 335 Auto Image Rotation sssssssssesssssseseseeeseeseeeereeereessessssssssssnssss 336 Dust off Ref Photo Battery INFO Wireless Transmitter 3 Image Authentication 00 eesseescccssecccssescsssecccssecssseeecssneeeseee 342 Copyright Information scsecsssssssssseccssessecsseeceestecssseeeeenseees 343 Save LOad Settings seesscccssesesecsssesscsessssesssessssecsecssseesseesssees 344 GPS iis sins desesscvanccuscssssevszonaesesascausensavanaseoddvosbncesvunsoauctraseasouvaasendtatanss 346 Virtual Horizon 346 Non CPU Lens Data 346 AF Fine Tune 347 Firmware Versi M ssessssssseessssesssessssesssessssessssssssessseesssessseesssees 348 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 349 D Lighting 354 Red Eye Correction 355 TPMT e ARATE NEEESE AE AA AEST 356
280. sssssssscsecscsecscseceres pg 190 ENGL OCK tx cstesreccssscececssssezestsesecsesss E pg 192 183 184 The Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 17 56 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F and can cover the field of view of a24mm lens or a 16mm lens in DX format It supports i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR which uses monitor pre flashes to adjust flash output for balanced lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate but when filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch light to the subject s eyes The following types of i TTL flash control are supported i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by 1 005 segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see pg 210 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into ac
281. ssssssssssssesssesssseersssssseressssssree 284 a3 Dynamic AF Af sssssssssssssssssssseseeeeecceeeeeseseeeesessesssssssnesss 285 a4 Focus Tracking with Lock On 287 a5 AF Activation sssssssessssessss 287 a6 AF Point Illumination 288 a7 FOCUS Point Wrap Around sesecsssssccssescecstecesseecenseees 288 a8 AF Point Selection s ssssessssssssssesssseessseessssresssseesssrersreeseeee 289 a9 Built in AF Assist Illuminator a10 AF On for MB D10 Metering EXposure 292 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value sssssssssssssssssssssssessssersssssssee 292 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl sssss ssssssssssssssssssssseeresssssee 292 b3 Exp Comp Fine TUNE ssssssssssssseseesssessssressseesssseessseeesseeessse 292 b4 Easy Exposure COMpeNsatiOn sssescccssescessseceeseeeeeee 293 b5 Center Weighted Area sssssscsssssscsssessessecssseeesenecssnees 294 b6 Fine Tune Optimal ExPOSULe sssessccsecsssesecesseeeeenee 294 CHTHIMES AE LOCK sccesssscnscescanicionsccsnnssesesvensoeoccasianisnsnsnoncesciniscennsngns 296 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L c2 Auto Meter off Delay c3 Self Timer Delay 297 C4 Monitor Off Delay eeessssssscssssecsssessccsecsssesecssseesssnsecssneees 297 d Shooting DisplaY isss 298 dl Beep ir A EA R 298 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display sssscsssscccssecccsseeceseeeesneees 298 d3 Screen TIPS essssecsseecsseesseees 298 d4 CL Mode Sh
282. stom Original Picture Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon Control icon in the top right corner of the edit display La a iSharpening A 7 Contrast Brightness Saturation Hue GBGrid GOK Reset 171 172 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software BE Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera 1 Select Load save BB Menage Picture Control Le In the Manage Picture C Soweit Control menu highlight Load N i save and press P 2 Select Copy to camera BB Manage Picture Control E Load save Highlight Copy to camera and i 1 CODY to camera A press P N eer Copy to card 3 Select a Picture Control fey Manage Picture Control _ g Copy to camera Highlight a custom Picture DEETAN Control and either 1 COBNONOCHRONE 02 e press to view current Picture Control settings or CD Grid r Confirm e press to proceed to Step 4 PE a Sharpening 7 Contrast E Brightness Saturation Hue GD Grid Done 4 Select a destination Bal Manase Picture Contro Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and press gt ESC6 Unused E307 Unused
283. t or Print 0 OF p DPOF option g ba E Selected gt 3 Highlight a picture iy Delete P Selected 100 1 Ks 2 Faw 3 WOK Oset Zoom To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button 4 Press the center of the Delete multi selector to select the Bj Seeded highlighted picture J Fila Keh Fa Selected pictures are marked by an icon When selecting pictures for printing press the Om button and press A or V to choose the number of copies 5 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures To deselect a picture highlight it and press center of multi selector 261 262 6 Press to operation A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press Delete complete the Nik lfeooos button a Selected Delete 3 images Select this option to delete pictures Protected and hidden images will not be deleted Option Description ff Selected Delete selected pictures All Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback pg 263 Playback Folder Choose a folder for playback Option Description ND700 Pictures in all folders created with the D700 will be default visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Only pictures in the current folder will be visible Current during playback H
284. t Selection The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that together cover a wide area of the frame The focus SOF point can be selected manually allowing photographs to be eo composed the main subject AP cia mode selector positioned almost anywhere in the frame single point and dynamic area AF or automatically auto area AF note that manual focus point detection is not available when auto area AF is selected To select the focus point manually 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point At default settings the center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a6 AF point illumination pg 288 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a7 Focus point wrap around pg 288 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a8 AF point selection pg 289 For information on changing the role of the multi
285. t the card as described below vV Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding pg 238 1 Turn the camera on Power switch 2 Press the lt buttons ft button MODE button Hold the MODE and tt buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds A blinking F a r will appear in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder To exit without formatting the memory card wait six seconds the default setting until F ar stops blinking or press any button other than the MODE and buttons 3 Press the buttons again Press the MODE and i buttons together a second time while F a r is blinking to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings 43 m Memory Cards e Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera e Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for recording or playback e Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not remove memory c
286. tach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press the lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Mounting index If the lens is equipped with an A M or M A M switch select A autofocus or M A autofocus with manual priority 3 Remove the lens cap EE Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap 1 CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring pg 370 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number See the lens manual for details Lens An AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED lens is used in this manual for illustrative purposes Focal length scale Mounting index Focal length index Lens cap VR vibration reduction ON OFF switch Zoom rin 3 Focus ring pg 81 37 38 Basic Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed Choose a language and set the time and date Note that if the time and date are not set will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded wit
287. that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 21 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space allowing applications that support color management to automatically select the correct color space For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the D700 Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash This chapter describes how to use the built in flash Me BuiltsimFlaSMicccccsssscocssccccescerscssssecccsecccesesesesessesecesee pg 184 Using the Built in Flash essossssossoscoscscoscscescsssseseosee pg 185 BlaSW MOG eS iracaiccccccsssccscsccesccsessecssecessssssscuseosesssesececassvess pg 188 Flash Compensation c scscssscssssss
288. the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex Nikkor lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out After changing the zoom position select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture BE The Non CPU Lens Data Menu 1 Select Non CPU lens data SETUP MENU Image authentication Highlight Non CPU lens data Ptoprens GPS Virtual horizon in the setup menu pg 331 and press Pb AF fine tune E Firmware version 2 Select a lens number E Non lt PU tens data Highlight Lens number and Dai press lt or gt to choose a lens Sar amp fee number between 1 and 9 ww Maos 3 Selecta focal length E Nor cPU lens data Highlight Focal length mm Dai and press lt or gt to choose a By foc tenth focal length between 6 and m
289. tically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color Dark on light Light on dark 301 302 d8 LCD Illumination At the default setting of Off the control panel backlight LCD illuminator will only light while the power switch is in the 8 position If On is selected the control panel will be illuminated while the exposure meters are active pg 48 Select Off for increased battery life d9 Exposure Delay Mode At the default setting of Off shutter is released when the shutter release button is pressed When shooting with Tripod selected in live view mode pg 96 or in situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures On can be selected to delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised d10 MB D10 Battery Type To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA batteries are used in the optional MB D10 battery pack match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL3e or optional EN EL4a or EN EL4 batteries Option Description BLR6 LR6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNiWH HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries BFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries QZR6 ZR6 AA Ni Mn Select when using ZR6 Ni Mn AA batteries Using AA B
290. tilock when Camera is in focus mode C use AE L shutter release button is 79 AF L button to lock focus pressed halfway Image size can not be 3 changed Image quality set to NEF RAW 64 e Unlock focus selector lock 76 e Auto area AF selected for focus 74 mode choose another mode __ e The camera is in playback mode 217 Can not select focus point e The camera is in menu operation 259 e Press shutter release button 48 halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters Camera is slow to record Turn long exposure noise reduction 277 photos off e Sound of mirror clicking down 95 when shutter release button was pressed halfway in hand held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter Phot t dedi Stes ner recorded in e Unless Release is chosen for 95 284 live view mode Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when focus mode S is selected in hand held mode Problem Solution Page e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or 106 278 Randomly spaced bright turn high ISO noise reduction on pixels noise appearin Shutter speed is slower than 1 s 277 photos use long exposure noise reduction e Camera is in focus mode C 72 e Center focus point is not selected 74 for single point AF or dynamic area AF AF assist illuminator does Off selected for Custom Setting 290 a9 Built in AF assist not light A illuminator e
291. ting The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open flash producing a strobe light effect pg 310 Ch Commander Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling mode one or more remote optional flash units pg 311 Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The Shooting Information Display The flash control mode for the built in flash can be viewed in the shooting information display pg 189 ENHA ODN AE se oe TA OTD ESD ay ABT The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached E 03 Optional flash and turned on Custom Setting e3 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode Mion P Ms Manual for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash and Commander mode options are not available 309 310 BE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 1 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 18 59 m ft ISO 200 20 C 68 F BE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter SS 3 Flash entri for built in flash Repeating flash is open producing a strobe light effect Output Times Frequency Press lt or P to highlight the following oer options A or to change BD vu Wa 2715 1 50 OK Option Description Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power Choo
292. ting a6 AF point illumination the DX format crop is shown by a frame in the viewfinder when DX format is active If Off is selected the area outside the DX format crop is indicated by a transparent mask DX format crop 59 60 DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller picture angle than lenses for 35 mm format cameras If Auto DX crop is off and FX format 36 x 24 is selected for Image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out a peee DX format 24 x 16 i Di image circle DX format FX format OFX format 36 x 24 image circle Image area can be set using the Image area option in the shooting menu or if image area is assigned to the Fn button by pressing the Fn button and rotating the main command dial EE The Image Area Menu 1 Select Image area SHOOTING MENU e Shooting menu bank AU Reset shooting menu Y Active folder 100 File naming DSC Image quality NORM Image size al Q Highlight Image area in the shooting menu pg 268 and press gt Ed JPEG compression kA 2 Choose an option E imase area a Highlight Auto DX crop or De Choose image area and ba a Choose image area press gt 3 Adjust settings E Image area E Choose im
293. ting can also be adjusted from the shooting information display pg 15 Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched sRGB sRGB default Adobe Adobe RGB 1 Select Color space a SHOOTING MENU Gy NEF RAW recording Bi A Whi UT Highlight Color space in the z RS sa shooting menu pg 268 and sa Active DLishting OFF press gt N Visuetta catia ON E Long exp NR OFF 2 Selecta color space BB Color space a Highlight the desired option Y and press da E Ate Adobe RGB The Shooting Information Display The color space can also be selected in the shooting information display pg 15 181 182 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications
294. tion and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter pp 392 395 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Lens contacts Keep the lens contacts clean Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored but this has no affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing adesiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of st
295. tiple Images Thumbnail Playback Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM sssssssssssscsseesesseescnsees Protecting Photographs from Deletion sssseccsssescsnseecsnsees Deleting Individual Photographs 0 sesssssssscssssecensesecsneeecenseeees Connections CONNECTING to a COMPUTES eccescsessseessessseesseessessseessessssesseessees 238 Direct USB CONNECTION sesssssecsssessssssecsssseesssncssssseessneeesess 240 Wireless and Ethernet Networks esssssssessssessssesesesnseesseeene 242 Printing PHOtograpls ssessccssesecssesscessssccssssecsssescessesecsnseesssneeees 243 Direct USB CONNECTION ou csesssssecsssessssssecsssseesssscsssseeessneessae 244 Viewing Photographs ON TV ssesesssssssessseescsseeessssescesseeecnssesensees 255 Standard Definition Devices oe essssessccssseessecssseessessseesseensee 255 High Definition Devices sssssssecsssseccsseesesssecssseseesntecssneeesees 257 Menu Guide 259 The Playback Menu Managing IMages sssscccseccsseseeees 260 PSL S E E EA OA E EE 262 Playback Folder iseinu 263 Hide Image Display Mode Image Review After Delete Rotate Talll o n seeesssssssssssccsssesscccssssseccesnssseseessseseseensseseessseeeseenees Slid SOW sscaisnssisacsisisscdousnaisntacapscsesswussasesoatosecgvaivaosansussaseusasteons Print Set DPOF sescsccdjescsscssosecccsssssicasivsasbecsdosssesssasssncsarsbolasvones 267 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options ss ssssssssssrsssssssss
296. to the right increases the amount of blue B At settings other than 0 a 4 icon appears in the control panel WB button Sub command Control panel dial Choosing a Color Temperature When KI Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel WB button Sub command Control panel dial 1 Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu Note that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value selected in the white balance menu 147 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera pg 150 Direct measurement Copy from existing White balance
297. tographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the fi button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted pp 43 332 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the On button The photograph will be marked with a icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Om button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the O n and t buttons together for about two seconds 235 i Deleting Individual Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the t button Once deleted photographs can not be recovered 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list 2 Press the T button PN A confirmation dialog will be displayed Full Frame TT a Y Delete Yes boisi Thumbnail Playback To delete the photograph press the i button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the P button See Also To
298. ton is pressed Option Description Shutter AF ON default AF ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the AF 0N button Autofocus can be performed with the AF ON button or by pressing the shutter release button halfway 287 a6 AF Point Illumination Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as Piri needed to establish contrast with the background DX format crop is indicated by frame in viewfinder The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of the background DX format crop is On indicated by frame in viewfinder Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see off The selected focus point is not highlighted Area outside DX format crop is indicated by transparent mask in viewfinder a7 Focus Point Wrap Around Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the viewfinder to another Option Description Focus point selection wraps around e from top to bottom bottom to top 2 o right to left and left to right so that Wrap ifor example pressing when a focus Lee point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounde
299. tore default settings Two button reset 196 How do restore shooting menu Reset shooting menu 271 defaults How do I restore Custom Setting Reset custom settings 282 defaults How do I change the self timer delay Self timer delay 297 How do I turn the speaker off Beep 298 Can reverse the electronic analog Beverc indicators 330 exposure display Can I display the menus in a different E 334 language Can I save menu settings for use on a 1 different D700 camera Save load settings eae Menus and Displays Question Key phrase See page How a get more information on a Help 31 menu How do I use the menus Using the menus 26 Can get quick access to frequently My Menu 364 used settings Can get quick access to recently used Recent settings 368 settings vi Question Key phrase See page What do these indicators mean Viewfinder control What information is in the shooting panel shooting 8 10 12 information display information display What does this warning mean Error messages and 409 displays How much charge does the battery Battery level 46 have left How do I get more information about the battery Battery info 340 How do I keep the file number from bei t when insert eing reset when I insert a new memory scanned 300 card How do reset file numbering to zero How do clean the camera or lens Cleaning the camera 391
300. tored in the bank even when the camera is turned off and will be restored the next time the bank is selected Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A B C and D A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described on page 270 Custom Settings Bank The bank letter is shown in the shooting information display which can be viewed by pressing the M button the Custom Settings bank can also be selected from the shooting information display pg 15 If settings in the current bank have been modified from default values an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu Reset Custom Settings Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom Settings bank See page 420 for a list of default settings Custom Settings are not reset when a two button reset is performed Option Description 282 Yes Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank No default Exit without changing Custom Settings a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection This option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus pri
301. tter speed oe 118 121 4 Exposure MOE qu eesessesseeeeeseees 114 Exposure compensation 5 Image size Val Eiana eS 128 6 Image quality Flash compensation value 190 7 White balance fine tuning ISO sensitivity ssssssssssssssrssrerserersese 106 HCIO seas cedsscdesh ces tetne cesar tenet 146 White balance fine tuning 146 White balance cssssssssssssssssseseeee 140 Color temperature 9 Number of exposures White balance preset YEMAIN Ng ssssssessessscccccccecessnsteeseeeeeeee 47 Number of shots remaining Number of shots in exposure before memory buffer fills 87 and flash bracketing Capture mode indicator 239 SEQUENCE isisisi 131 Number of shots in WB bracketing Sequence 135 Number of intervals for interval timer photography sssssssssssrssssersessserrssss 206 Focal length NON CPU lenses ccc 212 2 Shutter speed lock icon 326 3 Flexible program indicator 117 Preset white balance recording indicator Manual lens number 10 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 11 Flash MOde sescccsseecsseeseeeeeees 185 12 Multiple exposure Tae et lt 0 ee 200 15 28 16 i K 26 a TA anora EE 3 O SV BKT Taiho Mt ihiihi _ 23 19 22 E gt dreams 20 21 13 Aperture f number 119 121 Aperture number Of Stops 120 373 Exposure and flash bracketing increment 00 132 WB bracket
302. ttioe ewosure a Y Done a Number of shots Highlight Auto gain and press gt 5 Set gain fy Multiple exposure Highlight one of the following options and press Option Description Gain adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 2 for 2 exposures 3 for 3 exposures etc off Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if background is dark On default 199 200 6 Select Done Be Muttiote exposure a Highlight Done and press A Y icon will be displayed in the to Number of shots Auto gain control panel To exit without taking a multiple exposure select Multiple exposure gt Reset in the shooting menu Frame a photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low ZN speed release modes pg 84 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In single frame release mode one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 202 The icon will blink until shooting ends When shooting ends multiple exposure mode will end and the icon will no longer be displayed Repeat steps 1 7 to take additional multiple exposures m Multiple Exposure Do not remove
303. ty auto control option in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user see page 106 If On is chosen ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user flash level is adjusted appropriately The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 200 In exposure modes P and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed Slower shutter speeds may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity When On is selected the control panel and viewfinder show ISO AUTO When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the viewfinder Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 278 Foreground subjects may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter speeds in daylight or against a bright background Choose a flash mode other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or Mand choose a larger aperture Note that when the flash is used the camera uses the sh
304. ub command dial BE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance GB White balance O option Fluorescent Select White balance in the E gt co shooting menu pg 268 then ie highlight a white balance He option and press gt If an option other than Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Fluorescent is selected highlight a lighting type and press gt If Choose color temp is selected highlight a color temperature and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 156 before proceeding 143 144 2 Fine tune white balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color temperature with each increment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Coordinates Adjustment Increase green Green G i Blue B HHO Amber A Increase magenta Magenta M Increase blue lt ______ _ _ Increase amber Press 8 Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu If white balance has been fine tuned on the A B axis a lt gt icon will be displayed in the control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the
305. uce noise While photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Jab ar will blink in the shutter vob nr Ba speed aperture displays for a LAINS period of time approximately equal to the current shutter speed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Photographs can not be taken until processing is complete and jab nr has cleared from the displays Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off before processing is complete Off default Long exposure noise reduction off The Shooting Information Display Long exposure noise reduction can be adjusted from the shooting information display pg 15 277 278 High ISO NR Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Option Description HIGH High Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO Normal 2000 and higher While photographs are being NORM default processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from LOW Low High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0 3 and higher The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR Off The Shooting Information Display High ISO noise reduction can be a
306. ue Insert paper of Out of paper Printeris out ot selected size and 244 paper select Continue 415 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Solution Page Check ink a link rt Check ink To resume 244 supply select Continue Out of ink _ Printer is out of ink Replace inkand 244 select Continue See printer manual for more information 416 Appendix The Appendix covers the following topics LADLE O i eA NE AEP AEN AEE E EEEE e Memory Card Capacity Exposure Program ssssssssessssrssessesrssessesresesses e Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range 417 418 Defaults The following defaults are restored either with a two button reset or using Reset shooting menu or Reset custom settings HE Defaults Restored with a Two Button Reset pg 196 Option Default ISO sensitivity pg 106 200 Image quality pg 64 JPEG normal Shooting Image size pg 69 L menu White balance pg 140 Auto Fine tuning pg 143 Off Choose color temp pg 147 5000 K Focus point pg 76 Center Exposure mode pg 114 Programmed auto Flexible program pg 117 Off AE lock hold pg 126 Off Other Exposure compensation pg 128 Off settings Flash compensation pg 190 Off Bracketing pg 130 Off Flash mode pg 188 Front curtain sync FV lock pg 192 Off Multiple exposure pg 198 Off 1
307. uilt in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place M The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 24 300 mm in FX format pg 374 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses If the flash fires in continuous release mode pg 86 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed 4 The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause See Also See page 192 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed pg 305 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed pg 308 For information on using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash pg 309 See page 377 for information on using optional flash units For information on the range of the built in flash see page 427 187 Flash Modes The camera supports the following flash modes Flash mode Description Front curtain sync This mode is recommended for most
308. unctions pg 323 are indicated by and icons If separate functions have been assigned to button press and button dials the latter assignment can be viewed by pressing the amp button 15 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings button gt S Fn button Flash mode Bracketing Flash compensation PERPEIT f ee Sub command dial QUAL button Image quality button Exposure compensation LL White balance A size f y WB button A 2 MODE button Exposure mode Main command dial IS0 button ISO sensitivity 16 EE mage Quality and Size Press the QUAL button and rotate the command dials Set image quality pg 65 Choose an image size pg 70 EE SO Sensitivity Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial Control panel Set ISO sensitivity pg 106 E ISO button Main command dial r J Control panel 18 BE Exposure Press the MODE button and rotate the main command dial to choose the exposure mode Choose the exposure mode pg 114 MODE button Main command dial Control panel Use the command dials to adjust exposure Choosea combination of aperture and shutter speed exposure mode P pg 117
309. unis 4 000 mm a Move 4 Selecta maximum E Nor CPU lens data aperture 3 x Done Highlight Maximum aperture ca nth nr and press lt or gt to choose a seeorapeitinn maximum aperture between z an f 1 2 and f 22 The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens 211 5 Select Done Bay Non CPU lens data Highlight Done and press The specified focal length and z seinere aperture will be stored under ug Masimam sertare Way the chosen lens number This Move set combination of focal length and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens number using camera controls as described below BE Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number as the command dials option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu Non CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the Fn button Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button pg 320 the depth of field preview button Custom Setting f6 Assign preview button pg 324 or the AE L AF L button Custom Setting f7 Assign AE L AF L button pg 325 212 Use the selected control to choose a lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal Maximum length aperture E3 ea M
310. units Flash sync speed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250s D a Built in Optional Built in Optional Built in Optional Shutter speed flash flash unit flash flashunit flash flash unit 1 8 000 1 320 S Auto FP Auto FP 1 320 1 250 S Flash sync Auto FP 1 250 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases 306 M The Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected 307 308 e2 Flash Shutter Speed This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when using front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction in programmed auto or aperture priority auto exposure modes regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in shutter priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s the default setting to 30 s 30s e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description Ti TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to default shooting conditions M Manual Choose the flash level pg 310 RPT Repea
311. ure displays as a tilt meter see Custom Setting f5 Assign FUNC button gt FUNC button press pg 320 Non CPU Lens Data By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture for up to nine non CPU lenses the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions pg 210 AF Fine Tune Fine tune focus for up to 12 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus use only when required Option Description AF fine tune On Turn AF tuning on On e Off default Turn AF tuning off Off Tune AF for the current lens CPU Move focal lenses only Press A or W tochoose point away Current Saved a value between 20 and 20 from camera value value Values for up to 12 lens types can be AF ra tine stored Only one value can be Saved value stored for each type of lens rie aca KE Choose the AF tuning value used i Default when no previously saved value 3 exists for the current lens CPU Move focal Previous lenses only pointtoward value camera List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press i To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Save
312. ures are automatically On rotated for display in the camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation pg 336 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in default wide landscape orientation 265 Slide Show Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder pg 263 Hidden images pg 263 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and press The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress To Press Description Skip back skip Press lt q to return to previous frame to skip ahead to next frame View additional gt photo info OY Change photo info displayed pg 220 Pause slide show Pause slide show see below Exit to playback MENU End slide show and return to playback menu menu Exit to playback 5 End slide show and exit to full frame pg 218 mode or thumbnail playback pg 232 Exit to shooting Press shutter release button halfway to return mode L to shooting mode A dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends or when the button is pressed to pause playback Select Restart to restart if the slide was paused the show will Peme resume fr
313. urned off with a battery and memory card inserted the frame count and number of exposures remaining will be displayed 547 some memory cards may only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Adjust Camera Settings This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings T Check camera settings EA Exposuremode HE i25 D A 54 mage quality White balance 1SO sensitivity Control panel Viewfinder display Default settings are listed below Option Default Description Page inane NORM Record JPEG images at a compression ratio a JPEG _ of roughly 1 8 Size priority selected for 64 oe normal JPEG compression Ideal for snapshots Image size L FX format images are 4 256 x 2 832 pixels in 69 Large size Iso 200 ISO sensitivity digital equivalent of film 106 sensitivity speed set to ISO 200 White AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically for 140 balance Auto natural colors under most types of lighting P Camera automatically adjusts shutter speed Exposure i m e Programmed and aperture for optimal exposure in most 114 auto situations Center Focus focus point i i 76 point single F point AF ocus pomt Viewfinder focus point display is shown above Camera focuses on subject in center focus point when shutter release button is pressed halfway 50 2
314. utter speed selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync Speed pg 305 in place of the value selected for Minimum shutter speed 109 110 Exposure Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure This section describes the options available to control exposure including metering exposure mode exposure lock exposure compensation and bracketing MG Teri ieiereecitecescccscccstctecsceceestecteesectsccsserscecesesestecerccvers Exposure MOCO ce rccsccsesssccecencecscessscsecoscuesesceececeeccseccsceees Ps Programmed AUto sscscsssscsssecsssecsssccssssceseecessecsseecsncesnscesnecs Shutter Priority Auto A Aperture Priority Auto Aa e E E E SA E Autoexposure AE LOCK oreeson EE Aetra orere et Exposure Compensation Bracketing eaer aae eA EAEE Erer earra r 111 112 Metering Metering determines how the camera sets exposure The following options are available Method Description to 3D color matrix II Recommended in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of brightness color distance and composition for natural results E Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center of amn frame defaults to 12 mm circle in o center of viewfinder if CPU lens is _ wy attached area can be selected using Custom Setting b5 Center weighted area pg 2941 Classic meter
315. utter can only er indicator be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button c is pressed halfway If subject moves camera will engage predictive focus tracking pg 73 to predict final distance to Continuous cervo AF subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority Camera does not focus automatically focus must be M adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring If Man al maximum aperture of lens is f 5 6 or faster viewfinder pg 81 focus indicator can be used to confirm focus electronic range finding pg 82 but photographs can be taken at any time whether or not subject is in focus 72 Choose single servo AF for landscapes and other stationary sub jects Continuous servo AF may be a better choice with erratically moving subjects Manual focus is recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus The AF 0N Button Autofocus can also be activated by pressing the AF ON button AF ON button Predictive Focus Tracking In continuous servo AF the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF 0N button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will b
316. utter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this option 329 330 f12 Reverse Indicators At the default setting of het ininnininte 072 the exposure indicators in the control panel viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select gi iQininteh 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right T The Setup Menu Camera Setup The setup menu contains the options listed below To display the setup menu press MENU and press lt to highlight the tab for current menu then press A or to highlight the setup menu tab for more information see page 26 Option See page Format memory card 332 LCD brightness 332 Clean image sensor 392 Lock mirror up for cleaning 395 Video mode 333 HDMI 333 World time 334 Language 334 Image comment 335 Auto image rotation 336 Dust off ref photo 337 Battery info 340 Wireless transmitter 242 Image authentication 342 Copyright information 343 Save load settings 344 GPS 215 Virtual horizon 346 Non CPU lens data 210 AF fine tune 347 Firmware version 348 1 Not available when battery is low 331 332 Format Memory Card Format the card Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required m During Fo
317. ven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the con Nikon Niki UOXIN a rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer xxiii XxiV Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photogr
318. viewfinder Other accessories 385 accessories are available for my camera What memory cards can use Approved memory 390 cards What software is available for my otherdecescors 388 camera Table of Contents Q amp A ING OX sssisiscssssesssssiedvasssnssiisssessescaaassssesscovsrasesevacisrconsstivbcsstncaedbinsseents iv F r Your Safety ssisscsssscvssssasesssssvssvsssssesennsiussssvesecssiudessssssnieieasesaeebinveay xviii NOTICES ansaiten aaae a aaa nea Kaa Ea aaia xxi Introduction 1 OVEPVIQW inrita ir n REE NN Ea T ESN asi 2 Getting to Know the Camera csssccssssecssssecessseccssesccsnscecsnseecesseeeeee 3 Camera IBOAY ccsssssssscssssasesatncscsscesiseiceancosssconistesavecscasenssaigeanensssensidicsines 3 The Control Panel c csessssssssessssesssscsssessssecssssesecssecesscssssesssecsneeessees 8 The Viewfinder Display sssssccsssscccssscssssscsssecceseesssnseessneesesaee 10 The Shooting Information Display ssssssccssssescssseeesseeseenee 12 The Command Dials Quick Start GUIdE Q eecesssessssecssssssessscsssessnesssessnccsscesscsseeesecssecsssesses Tutorial 25 Camera M NUGS scsscsscsssscscssessesscsscsecsessssserscnsesccnsenceseseessensessencencaneess 26 Using Camera M NUS essssscsssscseccssecsseecsseecsssecsscesseecseessssecsueesee 28 FAG IID AEE AEE A AE E A 31 First Steps uu esessessscsecsessceseees 32 Charge the Battery cssscssssscccsseccsssseccssseccsssesssnseessse
319. w Data 230 P F11 4 1 3 1 3 5 IsopAII Ps 1 Frame number total number of frames 2 Protect StAtUS ccsesesseesseeees 235 3 Camera name 4 Retouch indicator 349 5 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image pg 224 Horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness vertical axis shows number of pixels of each brightness in image 6 ISO sensitivity 7 Focal length sssesessccsssesescenees 8 GPS data indicator 9 Image comment TCI CATON iiris 10 Flash mode 11 Flash compensation 190 12 Exposure compensation 128 13 Metering method ee 112 14 Exposure MOdE ceessscsseeeesees 114 15 Shutter speed 118 121 16 Aperture 119 121 a 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on 18 27 19 26 l 2322 21 20 17 Picture Control ssssssssssesssessssese 162 24 Time of recording sses 38 18 Active D Lighting ss 180 25 Date of recording 38 19 File NAME sssssssssssssssssssesssseessssesss 274 26 Folder NaMe sssssssessssssrrsssrssee 272 20 Image Quality essences 64 27 White balance scenes 139 21 IMAGE SIZE eesscsnsssesscccsseeseceessees 69 Color temperature 147 22 IMAGE area Zesssssssssssssssesssssesenn 58 White balance fine tuning 143 23 Image authentication Preset manual ssscsccssssssssssssee 148 Tae 0 vasssssssss11s11101r1n1oror1n1orenee
320. when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised 104 ISO Sensitivity Reacting Faster to Light ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures This chapter describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually sceeee pg 106 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ssessssessossososcoscscsscsesee pg 108 105 Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 6400 in steps equivalent to 3 EV Settings of from about 0 3 1 EV below ISO 200 and 0 3 2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special situations ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is sol displayed in the control panel or See ie AS viewfinder IS0 button Main command dial og Iso Control panel Viewfinder ISO sensitivity 6400 The ISO Sensitivity Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu pg 268 106 ISO Sensitivity Settings The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value pg 292
321. while the Fn button is pressed Option Description AE lock Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second ME Reset on 4 time the shutter is released or the exposure meters release turn off Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and sn AE lock f AERO Hold remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off fa AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn Flash off l E button is pressed If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash bracketing is active in single frame release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is r pressed If white balance bracketing is active or Bracketing i BKT continuous release mode mode CH or CL is burst selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is held down in single frame release mode white balance bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH release mode Matrix Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Center Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn weighted button is pressed g Spot Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is metering pressed Access top Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY a
322. y To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol A This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product BE WARNINGS A Keep the sun out of the frame A Tum off immediately in the event of Keep the sun well out of the frame when shooting backlit subjects Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is in or close to the frame could cause a fire Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter control When operating the viewfinder diopter control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for i
323. y 1000 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots One EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 1900 shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 700 shots Nikon standard 2 One EN EL3e battery camera Approximately 2500 shots One EN EL3e battery MB D10 Approximately 2500 shots One EN EL4a battery MB D10 Approximately 4300shots Eight AA batteries MB D10 Approximately 1000 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S VR 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G ED lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW or TIFF RGB photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using VR vibration reduction
324. ync speed 305 a8 AF point selection 289 e2 Flash shutter speed 308 a9 Built in AF assist illuminator 290 e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash 309 a10 AF ON for MB D10 291 e4 Modeling flash 315 b Metering exposure e5 Auto bracketing set 315 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 292 6 Auto bracketing Mode M 316 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 292 _ 7 Bracketing order 317 b3 Exp comp fine tune 292 f Controls b4 Easy exposure compensation 293 f1 switch 318 b5 Center weighted area 294 f2 Multi selector center button 318 b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 294 f3 Multi selector 319 c Timers AE lock f4 Photo info playback 320 cl Shutter release button AE L 296 f5 Assign FUNC button 320 a Auto meter off delay 296 f Assign preview button 324 G Self timer delay 297 f7 Assign AE L AF L button 325 c4 Monitor off delay 297 f8 Shutter spd amp aperture lock 326 d Shooting display f9 Customize command dials 326 d1 Beep 298 10 Release button to use dial 328 d2 Viewfinder grid display 298 f11 No memory card 329 d3 Screen tips 79g f12 Reverse indicators 330 d4 CL mode shooting speed 299 281 C Custom Setting Bank Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings The new settings will be s

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Untitled - Faculty Home - Universiti Teknologi Malaysia  Télécharger le programme complet - Festival européen du film court  Manual de Instrucciones    602-0231-02  A oralidade nos cursos a distância de licenciatura em Letras com      New Elite 60 C 30 - Notices d`emploi pour chaudières, chauffe  russie - Diocèse d`Auch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file